Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute
Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute
Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
<strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>Globalisation</strong>:<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
Compared<br />
By<br />
Jens Barl<strong>and</strong><br />
A thesis submitted to fulfill the degree of<br />
Masters of Arts in <strong>International</strong> Relations<br />
United States <strong>International</strong> University – Africa<br />
Nairobi, Kenya<br />
May 2005<br />
i
Declaration<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
I hereby declare that this thesis is my own original work. It has not been published or<br />
presented in any other institution. All material obtained from other sources is cited.<br />
…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />
Jens Barl<strong>and</strong> Date<br />
Supervisor<br />
I hereby declare that this thesis has been presented for examination with my approval as<br />
the appointed supervisor.<br />
…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />
Professor Macharia Munene Date<br />
The Dean, School of Arts <strong>and</strong> Science<br />
I hereby endorse this thesis document subject to all the University requirements.<br />
…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />
Professor Ruthie C. Rono Date<br />
Vice-Chancellor, United States <strong>International</strong> University – Africa<br />
…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />
Professor Freida A. Brown Date<br />
ii
Content<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Abstract ............................................................................................................ 1<br />
Chapter 1: Introduction ................................................................................. 2<br />
Background <strong>and</strong> Problem Statement..........................................................................2<br />
Hypothesis..................................................................................................................4<br />
Objectives...................................................................................................................4<br />
Literature Review.......................................................................................................4<br />
Theoretical Frameworks ..........................................................................................14<br />
Definition <strong>and</strong> Examination of the Concept ‘<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>’ .................................15<br />
Methodology ............................................................................................................20<br />
Chapter 2: <strong>Globalisation</strong> of the Mass Media.............................................. 21<br />
The Economic <strong>Globalisation</strong>....................................................................................21<br />
Milestones in the History of <strong>Globalisation</strong> ..................................................21<br />
The Forces Behind the <strong>Globalisation</strong> Processes ..........................................24<br />
Mass Media Involvement in <strong>Globalisation</strong> ..............................................................26<br />
How Mass Media Came to be a Globalised Industry...................................27<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Spread of Democracy ...................................................31<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> as a Universal Concept....................................................................38<br />
<strong>International</strong> Regimes on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.........................................38<br />
Debates on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ...............................................................45<br />
Chapter 3: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ................................................. 58<br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian Context .......................................................................................58<br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.............................................................................58<br />
Reasons for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ..........................................................................62<br />
Mass Media in the Societies.........................................................................64<br />
Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.......................................................65<br />
Role of the <strong>Press</strong>...........................................................................................66<br />
Gathering Information..................................................................................69<br />
Publishing.....................................................................................................73<br />
Protection of Journalistic Activities .............................................................76<br />
i
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Chapter 4: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa................................................... 80<br />
The East African Context.........................................................................................80<br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.............................................................................80<br />
Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> .....................................................................90<br />
Mass Media in the Societies.........................................................................96<br />
Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa ........................................................98<br />
Role of the <strong>Press</strong>...........................................................................................98<br />
Gathering Information................................................................................100<br />
Publishing...................................................................................................103<br />
Protection of Journalistic Activities ...........................................................107<br />
Chapter 5: Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa Compared............................... 111<br />
Contexts <strong>and</strong> Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>................................................................111<br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>...........................................................................111<br />
Reasons for <strong>and</strong> Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ........................................112<br />
Mass Media in the Societies.......................................................................112<br />
The Aspect of the <strong>Press</strong>’ Role....................................................................114<br />
The Aspect of Gathering Information ........................................................115<br />
The Aspect of Publishing ...........................................................................115<br />
The Aspect of Protection of Journalistic Activities ...................................116<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Interactions Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.......................117<br />
Direct Links Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa ..................................117<br />
Relations to Global Regimes of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.........................................119<br />
Chapter 6: Conclusion ................................................................................ 122<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa ........................122<br />
Bibliography <strong>and</strong> Sources........................................................................... 129<br />
© Copyright: USIU, Kenya <strong>and</strong> Jens Barl<strong>and</strong>, Norway (jens@start.no)<br />
ii
Abstract<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom is what enables democracies to work. A free press is supposed to maximise<br />
political, social <strong>and</strong> cultural outcomes for citizens in a society. Democracy is commonly<br />
accepted as the global st<strong>and</strong>ard of good governance. Hence, globalisation spreads<br />
democracy including press freedom.<br />
This thesis examines what effects such a spread has on press freedom. Further,<br />
forces involved with globalisation has interests in how press freedom is formulated,<br />
interpreted <strong>and</strong> practised. The thesis elaborates on how these forces promote, spread <strong>and</strong><br />
even manipulate press freedom.<br />
In global communication there is a great gap between North <strong>and</strong> South. Global<br />
media in the North also perform a dominance over South. An effect is how global media<br />
are spreading Western values. Such perspectives are major issues in this thesis which gives<br />
attention to the two regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia is in the main-<br />
stream of Western democracies <strong>and</strong> ranks at the top level of press freedom globally. East<br />
Africa attempts to join democratisation processes conducted by globalisation. <strong>Press</strong> free-<br />
dom in East Africa is in a period of change between authoritarian systems <strong>and</strong> democracy.<br />
A globalisation perspective on press freedom calls attention to how different forces<br />
use or misuse press freedom in a global struggle for power.<br />
Constructivism theory is employed. That one focus on roles of regimes, agents <strong>and</strong><br />
circumstances. Then the following questions arise: Who or what rule global press<br />
freedom? Who or what spread press freedom globally? Which underlying forces support<br />
good conditions for global press freedom?<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom is only one among many concepts used in globalisation. However,<br />
the study of how these forces interact with press freedom illustrates the great game of<br />
globalisation.<br />
1
Chapter 1: Introduction<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
This thesis examines the spread of press freedom in the context of globalisation. The first<br />
chapter gives introduction to the issue, the core literature is reviewed, <strong>and</strong> theoretical<br />
framework, the concept of press freedom <strong>and</strong> methodology are clarified. Chapter two will<br />
analyse globalisation <strong>and</strong> how mass media <strong>and</strong> press freedom are involved in this process.<br />
Then, chapters three <strong>and</strong> four will be on press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries <strong>and</strong> East<br />
Africa. Chapter five will compare practices in the two regions. Chapter six will be the<br />
conclusion.<br />
Background <strong>and</strong> Problem Statement<br />
The globalisation process brings the whole world’s population into the same house, <strong>and</strong><br />
everyone is more or less influenced by <strong>and</strong> linked to each other. The globalisation process<br />
covers a huge agenda from environment, trade, peace <strong>and</strong> war as well as human rights,<br />
health, communication, culture, <strong>and</strong> football.<br />
For poor countries, democratisation has emerged as a governance issue, <strong>and</strong> with<br />
democratisation is the question of press freedom. <strong>Press</strong> freedom is considered to be a<br />
vehicle <strong>and</strong> agent which contributes to the spread of democracy.<br />
In a democracy the government is supposed to serve its people <strong>and</strong> is expected to<br />
carry out what is the common good for citizens. 1 To ensure authorities do what is expected,<br />
an educated <strong>and</strong> well-informed population is necessary to dem<strong>and</strong> transparency in<br />
1 Jackson, Robert H., “The evolution of international society” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The<br />
Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international relations (Oxford: Oxford University<br />
<strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 38-44; <strong>and</strong> Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia : comprehensive edition (London: Philip’s,<br />
2002), pp. 105-106 <strong>and</strong> 601.<br />
2
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
powerful institutions. In this regard, the mass media play the role of providing the needed<br />
flow of information. 2<br />
In Western democracies, the mass media have developed to enable the flow of<br />
information necessary for popular rule. These democracies <strong>and</strong> their mass media are<br />
intertwined. 3 However, the mass media need freedom to play such a role. From this point<br />
of view, the mass media’s m<strong>and</strong>ate is derived from the people, not from authorities. The<br />
ideal is that the mass media would then ensure that the authorities always serve people <strong>and</strong><br />
not any other goals. 4<br />
The focus of attention is on two regions <strong>and</strong> two countries; Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia as<br />
represented by Norway, <strong>and</strong> East Africa as represented by Kenya. These are quite different<br />
from each other, yet, the regions are connected to each other. Norway <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are<br />
considered to rank at the top of press freedom <strong>and</strong> are among those that spearhead further<br />
development of democratic instruments. 5 The East African countries are not at the bottom<br />
level of press freedom. However, these are still among poor countries where press freedom<br />
needs to be improved. 6 Additionally, press freedoms in those regions are interconnected<br />
because the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries link their aid politics to press freedom. 7 Due to the<br />
attention to Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa, a North-South perspective will be emphasised in<br />
this study.<br />
2<br />
Stiglitz, Joseph, “Transparency in Government” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass<br />
Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp.<br />
27-29 <strong>and</strong> 32-34.<br />
3<br />
Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes: A<br />
Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A<br />
Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 1-3, Altschull, J. Herbert,<br />
From Milton to McLuhan : The Ideas Behind American Journalism (New York: Longman, 1990), pp. 1-6.<br />
4<br />
Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, pp. 27-43.<br />
5<br />
Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues worldwide (Oxford: Focal <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
2001), pp. 69 <strong>and</strong> 88.<br />
6<br />
Merrill, John C., Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong> Communication : third edition (New York:<br />
Longman Publishers, 1994), p. 71; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003 : World <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> Review (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), pp. 27, 48 <strong>and</strong> 50.<br />
7<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, St.prp. nr. 1 : (2003-2004) : for budsjetterminen 2004 : Utenriksdepartementet<br />
(Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003), pp. 91-92 <strong>and</strong> 137; <strong>and</strong> Bourgault, Louise M., Mass Media in<br />
Sub-Saharan Africa (Indianapolis: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1995), p. 128.<br />
3
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Democracy as an instrument for good governance is not only based on constitut-<br />
ions, but also on law <strong>and</strong> order. Culture is another crucial element in the development of<br />
such a rule. Furthermore, if a democratic institution is copied from one country to another,<br />
it would probably work differently due to odd cultural conditions. 8 The spread of press<br />
freedom as an element in democratisation processes raises the question of what press<br />
freedom means <strong>and</strong> in what context. The problem that arises is whether the concept of<br />
press freedom can be transplanted from one country to another when the political <strong>and</strong><br />
cultural circumstances are different.<br />
Hypothesis<br />
While press freedom can be a universal concept, there are differences in the practice of<br />
press freedom.<br />
Objectives<br />
To provide underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom as a global concept.<br />
To establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the globalisation context as well as the concept of press<br />
freedom.<br />
To describe the practice of press freedom in two different regions, <strong>and</strong> then to compare<br />
these.<br />
To give a balanced description of press freedom in the context of globalisation.<br />
Literature Review<br />
A number of books deal with globalisation. Among them is The Globalization of World<br />
Politics : An introduction to international relations, edited by John Baylis <strong>and</strong> Steve Smith.<br />
8 Getecha, Ciru, “Audit Public Leadership as a Way of Combating Graft”, paper presented at the ‘Eastern<br />
Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at United States <strong>International</strong> University<br />
(USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004, pp. 4-7.<br />
4
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
It gives a fundamental underst<strong>and</strong>ing of global history, development of <strong>International</strong><br />
Relations theories, <strong>and</strong> several global issues. While the book is relatively broad range, it<br />
lacks critical approaches to globalisation processes <strong>and</strong> offers little on mass media as a<br />
global force.<br />
Andrew Williams’ book Failed imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth<br />
century presents different political actors’ agenda that were behind globalisation in the 20 th<br />
century. Its strength is in the underst<strong>and</strong>ing of how American interests have used global<br />
politics to develop a new world order that supports their own interests. American concepts<br />
such as open doors, free trade <strong>and</strong> democracy are introduced as good global concepts.<br />
Williams describes global politics as competing interests <strong>and</strong> not as fair play. He writes<br />
almost nothing about mass media’s role.<br />
Even more critical in approach to the globalisation processes is Richard Falk in his<br />
Predatory Globalization : A Critique. He paints a picture, from the bottom, of how<br />
globalisation’s adverse side strikes those who already were poor <strong>and</strong> weak. He predicts<br />
global instability <strong>and</strong> urges for global governance through a reformed United Nations.<br />
A much referred to philosopher for a critical <strong>and</strong> alternative approach towards<br />
globalisation is Immanuel Wallerstein. He gives a brief introduction to his thought in the<br />
chapter “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in the book <strong>International</strong><br />
theory: positivism <strong>and</strong> beyond edited by Steve Smith, Ken Booth <strong>and</strong> Marysia Zalewski.<br />
Derived from Marxism <strong>and</strong> Leninism, he describes the world as core, semi-periphery <strong>and</strong><br />
periphery. Accodring to Wallerstein’s theory, the actual world order is constructed to<br />
collect values for the capitalists in the core areas.<br />
Opposite to the critical approaches above, the World Bank’s report Globalization,<br />
Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy presents globalisation from<br />
the dominant actors’ point of view. It gives a lot of facts <strong>and</strong> attention to poverty <strong>and</strong><br />
development as well as to global trade.<br />
5
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Some books specifically deal with globalisation <strong>and</strong> the mass media. Edward S.<br />
Herman <strong>and</strong> Robert W. McChesney’s book The Global Media : The New Missionaries of<br />
Corporate Capitalism has two contributions. They describe the history of globalisation of<br />
mass media from simple newspapers to a global <strong>and</strong> extensive industry. An interesting<br />
aspect is how global radio has been used in ideological warfare, especially during the Cold<br />
War. Further, the book describes how media business <strong>and</strong> all other global businesses are<br />
intertwined. The book hardly covers media’s social responsibility, <strong>and</strong> has the view that all<br />
mass media are purely capitalistic actors.<br />
Lynne Joyrich’s Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern<br />
Culture is on post-modern theories. In her opinion, TV introduces its audience to a world<br />
of dreams where they become perfect consumers. The mass media are both agents for <strong>and</strong><br />
advertising channels for commodities. TV is supposed to “drug” its audience into losing<br />
critical capacity <strong>and</strong> being made passive. Her perspective is that of powerful companies<br />
<strong>and</strong> interests using the media as agents for business.<br />
John C. Merrill has edited Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong><br />
Communication that considers journalism as a global phenomenon. He describes how<br />
media are different around the world, <strong>and</strong> challenges journalists who operate in a<br />
globalised profession. One of his chapters is about press freedom around the world. His<br />
survey describes all the world’s regions in details <strong>and</strong> the book contains a lot of facts.<br />
However, globalisation process is taken for granted <strong>and</strong> the book does not challenge what<br />
the media’s role as global actors is supposed to be.<br />
John Herbert’s book Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues<br />
worldwide provides discussions on different aspect of press freedom. These include the<br />
government perspective as well as freedom according to media’s own market-driven<br />
approach. The book points out how competition within the media business creates new<br />
threats to press freedom, not from governments but from commercial forces.<br />
6
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The book News Culture by Stuart Allan deals with how a culture which determines<br />
news came up. He describes how a professional culture developed to become crucial to<br />
determine what is included or excluded from media’s coverage. Allan’s book is useful for<br />
journalists to think critically about their own professionalism.<br />
The book, The Globalization of News, edited by Oliver Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Terhi<br />
Rantanen, presents different views on global journalism <strong>and</strong> global culture. Most of all, the<br />
book gives attention to the dominant news agencies’ role in the globalisation process. The<br />
book has a broad perspective, where the news media are considered as agents for transfor-<br />
mation. Among the case studies, is the chapter on “From State Socialism to Deregulation”<br />
from Tanzania.<br />
The aspect of global patterns of dominance <strong>and</strong> subordination, is the major concern<br />
in George Gerbner, Hamid Mowlana <strong>and</strong> Kaarle Nordenstreng’s The Global Media Debate<br />
: Its Rise, Fall, <strong>and</strong> Renewal. During the 1970s UNESCO became the arena for the debate<br />
on a New World Information <strong>and</strong> Communication Order (NWICO), where poor countries<br />
confronted the rich world. Media’s role as a supporter of the world order, where the rich<br />
countries are superior, was the core of the debate, which the book describes. This is an<br />
important aspect about mass media <strong>and</strong> globalisation.<br />
The report Globalization of the Mass Media, published by the U.S. Department of<br />
Commerce, demonstrates most of all how global spreading of American media is a<br />
declared policy. The aim is stated to be to spread American businesses <strong>and</strong> American<br />
values. The important thing is that this report unveils pure American interests in<br />
globalisation, <strong>and</strong> the use of mass media.<br />
Concerning mass media ideology, J. Herbert Altschull’s From Milton to McLuhan :<br />
The Ideas Behind American Journalism gives the philosophical history of mass media<br />
growth in the West. The place of origin for the mass media was Europe. In the Anglo-<br />
American world in the 17 th <strong>and</strong> 18 th century philosophers such as John Milton, Thomas<br />
7
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Hobbes, John Locke, <strong>and</strong> David Hume were among those who influenced thinking about<br />
newspapers’ functions <strong>and</strong> effects in the society. In contemporary France, the great<br />
philosophers Montesquieu, Voltaire <strong>and</strong> Rousseau gave significant contributions. Those<br />
English <strong>and</strong> French philosophies merged in the founding of the new American constitution<br />
in 1787 <strong>and</strong> influenced development of the American concept of democracy, self-image<br />
<strong>and</strong> perception of the world. Underst<strong>and</strong>ing of present American mind of media <strong>and</strong><br />
democracy is provided by Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media edited by Richard Gunther <strong>and</strong><br />
Anthony Mughan. Due to the American hegemon status in forming a global culture<br />
through mass media, Exploring Media Culture by Michael R. Real completes this aspect.<br />
An African perspective is given by Johan Retief in Media Ethics : An Introduction<br />
to Responsible Journalism. The book focuses on concrete ethical cases, <strong>and</strong> is written by a<br />
South African scholar for African journalism students. Although press freedom is not<br />
discussed in particular, it emerges frequently as an underlying principle.<br />
A number of books discuss global mass media’s role as Africa’s image builder.<br />
Among these is Africa’s Media Image, edited by Beverly G. Hawk. The interaction<br />
between global media <strong>and</strong> African domestic policy as well as foreign policy are discussed.<br />
The case studies cover a wide time frame from “The Media <strong>and</strong> the Mau Mau” during<br />
Kenya’s struggle for independence, the Cold War, <strong>and</strong> even to current covering of<br />
emergencies. Another case study is the book Imaging the Congo : the international<br />
relations of identity, written by Kevin C. Dunn. The book is not only about media, but how<br />
the concept of identity is of growing concern within the field of <strong>International</strong> Relations. He<br />
labels Congo as ‘symbol of contemporary Africa’. He argues how Western stereotypes <strong>and</strong><br />
images of Congo <strong>and</strong> Congolese through their mass media have been demeaning to the<br />
country. Within the same perspective is Graham Mytton’s book Mass Communication in<br />
Africa. In particular his fourth chapter “Communication <strong>and</strong> Political Power” describes this<br />
thinking from political circles. He elaborates how strategies on mass media are included in<br />
8
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
the power politics, both by the colonial masters as well as the African rulers after<br />
independence.<br />
The World Bank is, among others, the chief agent for the globalisation process.<br />
During recent years press freedom has been included in the World Bank’s policy for<br />
development, democratisation <strong>and</strong> globalisation. An extensive political background for its<br />
policy is described in the book The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development, edited <strong>and</strong> published by The World Bank <strong>Institute</strong>. Most of all, the book<br />
discusses how to include the Third World <strong>and</strong> new democracies after the Cold War into the<br />
political systems built in the Western world. However, this book is more about politics<br />
than about journalism but it is useful in the way it looks at the media through both political<br />
<strong>and</strong> commercial lenses.<br />
However, the idea of press freedom crashes into other interests. William Miller has<br />
edited the book Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> : arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions where such perspectives<br />
are described. The essays examine press freedom as opposed to parliamentary sovereignty,<br />
national interests, responsibility, accountability, equality, <strong>and</strong> the moral community. The<br />
book shows that there are many things to consider other than press freedom, takes<br />
democracy as a given, <strong>and</strong> the basic value of press freedom is not challenged. Some aspect<br />
around how the press <strong>and</strong> its role has changed through the history are given by Mitchell<br />
Stephens in his A History of News. The book is about news as a genre, but his chapter<br />
about newspapers <strong>and</strong> revolutions is enlightening.<br />
There are several international bodies promoting press freedom even if the<br />
underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the concept may be variable. From the beginning UNESCO has been an<br />
important actor. Another is <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (IPI) which was founded partly as a<br />
result of processes within UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> connected to the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Committee. IPI has published its own history of promoting press freedom which gives the<br />
aspect seen from the inside of an international organisation. Three books, a pamphlet <strong>and</strong> a<br />
9
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
report cover the years from late 1940s to 2003: IPI – The First Ten Years, IPI: The<br />
Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part I: 1951-1976; IPI:<br />
The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part II:<br />
1976-1988; 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (covers 1993-2002); <strong>and</strong> IPI Report 2003<br />
: World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review.<br />
Further, books about Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian or Norwegian concept of press freedom can be<br />
represented by Den redigerende makt : Redaktørrollens norske historie (in English: The<br />
editing power : History of the Editor’s Role in Norway) written by Martin Eide. This is a<br />
history book on how the editor’s role as an institution developed in Norway. The book<br />
looks at the editor as a defender of press freedom, <strong>and</strong> discusses various threats to such a<br />
free <strong>and</strong> powerful role. Numerous references to Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark make the book ade-<br />
quate as a source for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. A weakness of this book is the impres-<br />
sion that the editor’s freedom is limited to freedom from government control, the owners’<br />
interference in editorial affairs, <strong>and</strong> some other forces which want to control the news. It<br />
does not discuss the possibility of being puppet of global cultural or ideological interests.<br />
Another Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian contribution is Kyrre Eggen’s Ytringsfrihet (in English:<br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression). The book covers almost every question about the right of free<br />
speech included debates where freedom of expression is in conflict with other interests.<br />
This book too, has many references to Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia as well as practices of free speech in a<br />
European legal context. However, the philosophical basis for such a democratic freedom in<br />
itself is not discussed very much. The author’s reason for that choice is that it is a book<br />
based on law, not the history of ideas.<br />
A global aspect from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia is given by the book Utviklingshjelp, utenriks-<br />
politikk og makt (in English: Development Aid, Foreign Politics, <strong>and</strong> Power) written by<br />
Terje Tvedt. The book is a result of a subproject in a Norwegian study of power <strong>and</strong> demo-<br />
cracy. One of his descriptions is how mass media as an actor is included in the Norwegian<br />
10
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
development aid policy. The book does not get into the core of press freedom, yet, media’s<br />
role in the interaction between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> Africa is exposed.<br />
Then, books presenting the African or Kenyan concept of press freedom is repre-<br />
sented by Louise M. Bourgault in her Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa. This book gives<br />
a broad <strong>and</strong> extensive underst<strong>and</strong>ing of mass media in Africa. The historical <strong>and</strong> cultural<br />
background are described <strong>and</strong> Kenya is covered through different cases. A valuable<br />
chapter is the one which discusses press freedom according to the African oral tradition<br />
<strong>and</strong> discourse style. Due to changes in African countries, democracies <strong>and</strong> mass media, her<br />
writing is not up to date. Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> collects contributions from a round-table<br />
conference in Zimbabwe in 1996 about press freedom in Africa. Several of the participants<br />
give papers at the core of North-South matters of press freedom.<br />
A relatively simple textbook is Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in<br />
Africa written by André Linard. The book is meant generally for the whole of Africa. The<br />
concept of press freedom is discussed according to ethics as well as legal limits. The book<br />
is a basic introduction, a good one indeed, yet without any deep background.<br />
Another book which has a practical approach is the H<strong>and</strong>book for African Journa-<br />
lists : With Leaders in African Journalism, edited by Malcolm F. Mallette. It is a simple<br />
<strong>and</strong> practical book. The book’s starting point is a consideration of the role of a free press<br />
which is a given condition for all the journalistic practice.<br />
A short, although important text, is Tom Mboya’s address to the IPI’s global confe-<br />
rence in Paris, 1962, on “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa”, included in<br />
his book The Challenge of Nationhood : A collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings. At that<br />
time of liberation, he pointed out the importance of an ‘Africanised’ press. His opinions<br />
were similar to those which arose during the NWICO debate. His views were influential on<br />
thoughts on <strong>and</strong> within the Kenyan press.<br />
11
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Philip Ochieng in I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics<br />
in Africa, accuses his colleagues within the Kenyan press, of joining the Western press’<br />
subjugating approach to Africa. In his opinion, Western commercial interests are a more<br />
serious threat to the freedom of the African press than bad governments. He contributes to<br />
this debate with radical <strong>and</strong> anti-mainstream reasoning. The book covers Kenya, Tanzania<br />
<strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Still in East Africa, there are three similar books which are oriented towards<br />
facts about media <strong>and</strong> press freedom in these countries. These are The State of the Media<br />
in Ug<strong>and</strong>a edited by Rose Mary Kemigisha, A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in<br />
Tanzania edited by Lawrence Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Joseph Mapunda as well as the more<br />
extensive Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya edited by Mitch Odero <strong>and</strong> Esther<br />
Kamweru. These three books are all sponsored by Friedrich Ebert Stiftung.<br />
Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs, edited by Charles Okigbo, portrays ideals of<br />
African social journalism. Distinctions of ‘African’ emerge compared with a traditional<br />
Western approach, for instance concerning the declared ideal of objectivity. The editor<br />
argues that in Africa journalism practice <strong>and</strong> political decisions are not completely<br />
divorced. The book is a broad <strong>and</strong> practical textbook about political journalism. Many<br />
books on journalism are written in the West. Therefore, this book’s major contribution is<br />
its African based content.<br />
Another core text is Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the<br />
Third World, edited by Michael Kunczik. His question to the whole debate on media ethics<br />
is: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line? Further, he discusses tensions around<br />
Western developed values in an African context. In particular the chapter “Anglophone<br />
Africa: Journalists – puppets of the proprietors?”, written by Joe Kadhi, elaborates on the<br />
space of press freedom within the reality of an African society <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism.<br />
The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya by John Baptist Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Absalom Aggrey<br />
Mutere gives the picture of the development of the Kenyan press, since its origin among<br />
12
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
white settlers <strong>and</strong> missionaires in 1895. The book covers emerging <strong>and</strong> foundations of the<br />
media organs as well as political forces, which constituted the environment. The book,<br />
which was issued in 1988, includes broader perspectives too, as press freedom, press<br />
organisations <strong>and</strong> matters on communication structure.<br />
Another history book is Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya<br />
recently written by Caroline Elkins. Of interest for this thesis is her descriptions on how<br />
the British colonial rule in Kenya manipulated media to be propag<strong>and</strong>a tools. Instruments<br />
established by the British have even had impact on Kenyan press freedom after<br />
independence.<br />
Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society is edited by Jerry Domatob, Abubakar Jika<br />
<strong>and</strong> Ikechukwu Nwosu. Their testimonials to leaders of the liberated African countries are<br />
harsh. Media were not liberalised when these leaders continued as the colonial rulers. In<br />
addition, strong Western media’s influence on political dynamics in Africa, related to the<br />
NWICO debate, is well covered as well. Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa is edited by<br />
Göran Hydén, Michael Leslie <strong>and</strong> Folu F. Ogundimu. This is a relatively up to date book<br />
about the role of media in democratisation in Sub-Saharan Africa. The book’s perspectives<br />
are multi-diciplinary. It provides examinations of democratisation in Africa within<br />
different contexts as History, Political, Technological, Economic <strong>and</strong> Cultural.<br />
A new book on Kenya is Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence<br />
edited by David Makali <strong>and</strong> published on behalf of The Media <strong>Institute</strong>. The detailed book<br />
has most of all a juridical approach to press freedom. From this point of view the texts<br />
contributes both in historical <strong>and</strong> political perspectives with a description of press freedom<br />
<strong>and</strong> the freedom of expression in Kenya. Several key judgements are surveyed.<br />
13
Theoretical Frameworks<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
There are two theoretical frameworks used in this thesis; one within the realm of Inter-<br />
national Relations, <strong>and</strong> another theory which is specific to the press’ role in societies.<br />
Within <strong>International</strong> Relations theories, the field of international institutionalisation<br />
seems to be able to explain the phenomenon of press freedom in the perspective of globali-<br />
sation. Robert O. Keohane <strong>and</strong> Joseph S. Nye Jr. edited Transnational <strong>and</strong> World Politics<br />
in 1970, whose major concern was to describe a complex pattern of world politics.<br />
Keohane <strong>and</strong> Nye took a liberal st<strong>and</strong> where they emphasise all non-state actors. They<br />
gave a theoretical framework which is labelled liberal institutionalism, a branch within<br />
neo-liberalism. They presented a variety of possible international actors, both connected to<br />
governments <strong>and</strong> nongovernmental, as well as actors who are superior to states. Their<br />
framework provides underst<strong>and</strong>ing of global forces independent of the states’ role.<br />
John Gerard Ruggie, in his book Constructing the World Polity : Essays on inter-<br />
national institutionalization, first published in 1998, claims neo-liberals such as Keohane<br />
<strong>and</strong> Nye, <strong>and</strong> neo-realists such as Kenneth Waltz, have merged into the mainstream which<br />
he labels ‘neo-utilitarianism’, whose weaknesses are the limits of positivism. He describes<br />
how he, as a constructivist, is able to use something from the mainstream, but mix it with<br />
elements from the classical tradition of Emily Durkheim <strong>and</strong> Max Weber. He puts himself<br />
into a category called neo-classical constructivism.<br />
What makes sense between Ruggie’s constructivism <strong>and</strong> press freedom, is the<br />
complexity of global actors <strong>and</strong> forces, <strong>and</strong> especially the notion of agents. Those are not<br />
limited to the organisations even if organisations can be agents. ‘Regime’, ‘agency’, <strong>and</strong><br />
‘circumstances’ are among the key concepts in constructivism. The common approach to<br />
press freedom in literature is functional as, for instance, such as absence of governmental<br />
interventions in the press’ affairs. <strong>Press</strong> freedom can be considered to be such an agent<br />
14
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
because of its capability to establish circumstances for democracy. This democratisation is<br />
a part of the globalisation process.<br />
Within theories about the media, the book Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong> by Fred S.<br />
Siebert, Theodore Peterson, <strong>and</strong> Wilbur Schramm published in 1956 is a classic. They<br />
categorised media’s role in four different political systems: First, in authoritarian systems<br />
the media have to serve the central authority. Second, in libertarian systems the individual<br />
rights are the most important interest for the media to serve. Third, in social responsibility<br />
systems media need to serve both individual <strong>and</strong> society. Fourth, in communist or totalitar-<br />
ian systems, the media have to serve the needs of society as interpreted by the Communist<br />
party. Several other views have emerged out of debates on these classical models. Ray<br />
Eldon Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Sheila Jean Gibbons’ book Exploring Mass Media for a Changing<br />
World added a fifth model: the the capitalistic system where media purely exist to make<br />
profit for their owners.<br />
These five different media systems constitute a theoretical framework which this<br />
thesis will use on media’s role in the sosiety. Below, it is pointed out how the three<br />
systems of libertarian, social responsibility <strong>and</strong> capitalism influence the dominant global<br />
media.<br />
Definition <strong>and</strong> Examination of the Concept ‘<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>’<br />
A typical definition of ‘press freedom’ in text books has a functional approach, for instance<br />
such as: “the mass media’s unquestionable right to discuss whatever is not explicitly<br />
forbidden by law, including the wisdom of any restrictive statute”. 9 The emphasised aspect<br />
is the press’ independence of intereference from any external interests. The attention is<br />
most of all given to how political authorities give the press space <strong>and</strong> freedom to play its<br />
9<br />
Among many examples, this one is quoted from: Ahuja, B. N., Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism (Delhi:<br />
Surjeet Publications, 2004), p. 4.<br />
15
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
autonomous role. An alternative approach is to emphasise press freedom as a regime, for<br />
instance as: “[…] This regime presupposes that information resources are significantly<br />
independent of political or economic powers…” 10<br />
The English pilosopher of the Enlightenment, John Locke, is among the most<br />
influental contributors to freedom thinking in Western democracies. In his contract theory,<br />
government need support from the governed. In addition, people have the right of<br />
revolution, even a duty to rise up against tyrants. These two assumptions have been the<br />
basis for civil rights such as freedom to say, print <strong>and</strong> publish opinions <strong>and</strong> beliefs. 11<br />
Search for truth was at the core in early philosophy about the press. The German<br />
printer John Peter Zenger, an immigrant to the United States, was in 1735 found not guilty<br />
in a case on seditious libel. The defense was that what he had written, was the truth. This<br />
was the start of the ideology where truth is given as reason for press freedom. The event is<br />
also celebrated as the origin of the watchdog principle. 12<br />
Despite honourable phrases, definitions <strong>and</strong> practices of press freedom have been<br />
flexible. The legal origin <strong>and</strong> the best conditions for a free press is often credited to be in<br />
the First Amendment of the Constitution of the United States in 1791 which states:<br />
“Congress shall make no law … abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press”. 13 This<br />
doctrine which ‘no law is the best law’ is in accordance with American liberalism where<br />
the ideal is a minimised state beyond serving individual freedom, order <strong>and</strong> security. The<br />
historical contrast was the Constitution of the Soviet Union which also guaranteed freedom<br />
10<br />
Linard, André, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in Africa (Nairobi: Paulines Publications,<br />
2002), p. 132.<br />
11<br />
Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 49-52.<br />
12<br />
Ibid., pp. 109-110.<br />
13<br />
Patterson, Thomas E., “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong><br />
Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge<br />
University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), p. 242.<br />
16
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
of the press. However, what the Soviets meant was freedom from capital, careerism, <strong>and</strong><br />
bourgeois archaic individualism. 14<br />
Another early influential thinker on press freedom is John Stuart Mill. His “Essay<br />
on Liberty” in 1859 has been credited as one of the founding documents of the liberalism.<br />
Mill was concerned with plurality, including the right to be wrong <strong>and</strong> make mistakes. The<br />
many sides of truth was among his reasons for need of free expression. He described that<br />
right as one of the most sacred. 15 Mill is much referred in Western as well as in African<br />
writings which indicate his global impact on the notion of press freedom. 16<br />
A twin concept of press freedom is ‘freedom of expression’ which is a cornerstone<br />
in democracy. The concepts press freedom <strong>and</strong> freedom of expression seem to overlap<br />
almost completely. Many text books mix these without clear distinctions but press freedom<br />
is among the means or conditions for a satisfactory working freedom of expression. Hence,<br />
these concepts are two sides of the same issue. 17<br />
In terms of democracy, a major point is that press freedom belongs to the public,<br />
not to the media corporates. If information is a public good, a necessity for democratic<br />
processes, the purpose for press freedom is that the press should get conditions to serve the<br />
public. 18<br />
A legal description of press freedom gives attention to four aspects of press free-<br />
dom. The case studies from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa will be organised in accordance to<br />
this classification. One aspect is content-neutral regulations arrangements. These influence<br />
the media indirectly, for instance, subsidies, customs, taxation, as well as anticompetition<br />
14<br />
Siebert, Peterson <strong>and</strong> Schramm, Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 125-126.<br />
15<br />
Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 161-172.<br />
16<br />
Ogbondah, Chris W., “Media Laws in Political Transition” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong><br />
Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), p. 58;<br />
<strong>and</strong> Makali, David (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence (Nairobi: Phoenix<br />
Publishers, 2003), p. 25.<br />
17<br />
Krug, Peter <strong>and</strong> Price, Monroe E., “The Legal Environment for News Media” in World Bank, The Right<br />
To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI<br />
Development Studies, 2002), p. 195.<br />
18<br />
Ibid., p. 194.<br />
17
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
laws. Those instruments may incite or obstruct a country’s mass media due to political<br />
preferences, <strong>and</strong> decide the scope of media’s role in that society. Another aspect is<br />
news gathering. That is about the media’s right to access information, <strong>and</strong> exceptions, the<br />
media’s criminal <strong>and</strong> administrative liability, relations with <strong>and</strong> protection of confidential<br />
sources as well as selection systems in licensing of journalists. The next aspect is about<br />
content-based regulations which cover the media’s right to publish <strong>and</strong> to decide over its<br />
own content. That right is not absolute. Different kinds of protections are established to<br />
protect other interests such as the state’s collective concerns as well as other private <strong>and</strong><br />
individual interests. Many competing freedoms in this area have to be regulated even in a<br />
liberal society. Finally, an aspect is about protection of journalistic activity. It may include<br />
‘internal press freedom’ which means arrangements that control the relations between<br />
media owners <strong>and</strong> their editorial staff. Towards authorities it is whether journalistic<br />
activities are offered privileges which function as protection, or opposite; harassment of<br />
journalists. 19<br />
More than 100 international non-governmental (NGO) or inter-governmental org-<br />
anisations (IGO) are involved in evaluating or promoting press freedom. Considered as<br />
agents, those organisations constitute a press freedom movement. Altogether, those<br />
provide numerous definitions <strong>and</strong> angles to underst<strong>and</strong>, consider or evaluate press<br />
freedom. Among those with great impact is <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> where members<br />
are among the senior executives in the world’s leading news media. IPI, based in Vienna,<br />
constitute an influential network well involved with the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO.<br />
IPI’s annually report World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review monitors press freedom worldwide by<br />
qualitative methods. Another important press freedom NGO is <strong>Freedom</strong> House, based in<br />
Washington, which through detailed legal, political <strong>and</strong> economic criteria measures press<br />
freedom in each country on a scale from 0 (best) to 100 (worst). A similar ranking is made<br />
19 Ibid., pp. 187-205.<br />
18
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
from Reporters Sans Frontieres, based in Paris, through 53 questions. Further, World <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> Committee coordinates the majority international organisations concerned with<br />
press freedom. 20 WPFC’s criteria for press freedom are formulated in twenty questions, for<br />
instance such as: “Are there restrictive press laws, are journalists in jail, is libel a civil or<br />
criminal offense?” <strong>and</strong> “Is government advertising allocated fairly?” 21<br />
Debates on press freedom <strong>and</strong> hence, the press’ responsibility, are often a hot<br />
issue. 22 The question is, how can responsibility be developed when the press claims<br />
independence? In many countries the media have introduced their own system of codes of<br />
ethics. The purpose has been to create a sense of professional responsibility, as well as to<br />
provide the industry with a system of conflict resolution. The idea is that in such a system,<br />
the government will not interfere with the details of the media’s behaviour <strong>and</strong> would not<br />
be a part of the conflict resolutions – except in the most serious cases which appear in the<br />
court. Such a system, made <strong>and</strong> introduced by the press itself, would be considered as the<br />
practice of press freedom. A similar system, made <strong>and</strong> introduced by the government, may<br />
be considered as an attack on press freedom. As a part of the global spread of press<br />
freedom, a corresponding system of self-governing codes of ethics for the mass media<br />
emerge in more <strong>and</strong> more countries. 23 These are typically administered by media councils<br />
initiated by the press itself.<br />
20 Becker, Lee B., Vlad, Tudor <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Nancy, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical Report (Athens, USA:<br />
Grady College of Journalism & Mass Communication, University of Georgia, 2004), pp. 1-8, 14-15 <strong>and</strong> 34-39.<br />
21 World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: “Criteria for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>”,<br />
http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Criteria%20For%20<strong>Press</strong>%20<strong>Freedom</strong>, downloaded 28 th March,<br />
2005. WPFC’s homepage: http://www.wpfc.org/<br />
22 Oloo, J. B., “Why media freedom is so vital” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), reader’s<br />
letter, 21 st December, 2003; <strong>and</strong> Ngari, Johnson L., “<strong>Freedom</strong> of the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> its responsibility” in East<br />
African St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 27 th April, 2004.<br />
23 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 69-75.<br />
19
Methodology<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
To examine the hypothesis, the thesis’ order starts with globalisation in general, <strong>and</strong> how it<br />
is intertwined with the mass media. The examination of press freedom will be based on<br />
already published data <strong>and</strong> information. Different aspects of press in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East<br />
Africa will include some case studies. The two regions will be described by similar models<br />
to fit into a comparative study. Development <strong>and</strong> the status of press freedom in these two<br />
regions illustrate the practice of international regimes of press freedom.<br />
Sources will be books <strong>and</strong> academic journals in libraries such as the Lillian K.<br />
Beam Library at USIU as well as at UNESCO in Nairobi. There will also be personal<br />
contacts with key-players involved in press freedom both in East Africa <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />
through oral interviews or e-mail. Further, some international organisations engaged in<br />
press freedom will provide information. Articles from magazines <strong>and</strong> newspapers as well<br />
as web-sites <strong>and</strong> unpublished documents will be used.<br />
20
Chapter 2: <strong>Globalisation</strong> of the Mass Media<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Globalised mass media supports other globalisation processes <strong>and</strong> are vehicles for the<br />
economic globalisation process. This chapter has three parts. First, the history of modern<br />
economic globalisation <strong>and</strong> its triggering forces. Second, is the mass media’s role in this<br />
process <strong>and</strong> media’s role in global spread of democracy as the st<strong>and</strong>ard of good<br />
governance. Third, is press freedom as a universal concept with attention to global press<br />
freedom regimes <strong>and</strong> critical debates.<br />
The Economic <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Although there are numerous definitions of ‘globalisation’, the one employed by the<br />
editors of The Globalization of World Politics, John Baylis <strong>and</strong> Steve Smith, is<br />
appropriate. They define globalisation as: “the process of increasing interconnectedness<br />
between societies such that events in one part of the world more <strong>and</strong> more have effects on<br />
peoples <strong>and</strong> societies far away.” 1<br />
Milestones in the History of <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The modern economic globalisation process can be divided into four phases. 2 First is the<br />
five decades before First World War dominated by the British <strong>and</strong> the French empires.<br />
These empires thought that an open international trade would benefit them because they<br />
had modern technology, steamships, railways, falling transport costs, <strong>and</strong> access to<br />
productive l<strong>and</strong> which contributed to growth in global trade. They led colonisation in<br />
Africa that was part of globalisation. Some countries without colonies in Africa which<br />
benefitted most from the open global trade included the United States, Argentina,<br />
1<br />
Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />
relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), p. 7.<br />
2<br />
World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy (Oxford: Oxford<br />
University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002), pp. 23-24.<br />
21
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Australia, <strong>and</strong> New Zeal<strong>and</strong>. These became some of the world’s richest countries due to<br />
l<strong>and</strong> resources, the possibility to import labour force, slaves <strong>and</strong> immigrants, <strong>and</strong> export<br />
commodities. 3<br />
Second was the period between the First World War <strong>and</strong> the Second World War 4<br />
in which there was a decline in international trade due to growing trade barriers,<br />
nationalism, <strong>and</strong> international conflicts. Nationalism resulted in protectionism. 5 Increased<br />
trade barriers removed the benefits of technical progress. The United States, which had<br />
gained huge surpluses from the free trade, wanted to take advantage of the peace process<br />
after the First World War <strong>and</strong> advocated further liberalisation of the global economy.<br />
Among the ideals in the American President Woodrow Wilson’s ‘Fourteen Points’ in 1918<br />
was how collective security could be ensured by cooperation <strong>and</strong> free global trade. If<br />
countries became dependent on each other, he believed, the price of war would rise. 6<br />
However, the British <strong>and</strong> the French had other interests <strong>and</strong> “won” the peace settlement<br />
including economic punishment of the Germans who failed to pay the imposed penalties.<br />
Trade barriers increased, trade policy supported cartels which excluded foreign<br />
competitors. 7 The Great Depression after 1929 worsened the economic situation around the<br />
world. These forces paved the way for Adolf Hitler <strong>and</strong> for another World War.<br />
Third was the period after the Second World War in which Britain <strong>and</strong> the other<br />
European empires were bankrupt <strong>and</strong> broke into pieces. When British Prime Minister,<br />
Winston Churchill, pleaded with the United States for help during the war, the Americans<br />
3<br />
Ibid., pp. 23-26; <strong>and</strong> Herman, Edward S. <strong>and</strong> McChesney, Robert W., The Global Media : The New<br />
Missionaries of Corporate Capitalism (London: Continuum, 1997), pp. 16-17.<br />
4<br />
The era from the First World War to after Second World War is based on: Williams, Andrew, Failed<br />
imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth century (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
1998), pp. 50-78; <strong>and</strong> World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 26-28. Other sources are<br />
indicated.<br />
5<br />
Halliday, Fred, “Nationalism” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, pp. 441-448.<br />
6<br />
Carruthers, Susan L., “<strong>International</strong> history 1900-1945” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of<br />
World Politics, pp. 56-57.<br />
7<br />
Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries: A Conceptual Framework” in Porter, Michael E.<br />
(ed.), Competition in Global Industries (Boston: Harvard Business School <strong>Press</strong>, 1986), pp. 42-43.<br />
22
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
took the opportunity to dictate the objectives of the war according to suit American<br />
interests. Global cooperation <strong>and</strong> free trade should be the order, under the United States’<br />
hegemony <strong>and</strong> institutions such as the United Nations, the <strong>International</strong> Monetary Fund<br />
(IMF), the World Bank, <strong>and</strong> the General Agreements on Tariffs <strong>and</strong> Trade (GATT) were<br />
designed as agents for this new world order. 8<br />
Global trade in this period meant increase in trade between developed countries, but<br />
trade barriers towards developing countries. Most of the developing countries did not<br />
participate in the growth of global manufacturing <strong>and</strong> trade during this period. 9 Some<br />
statistics may prove this unfair in global trade. From 1948 to 1988 British export per capita<br />
increased 305%, compared to the figure for Sub-Saharan countries which was 11%.<br />
Concerning import, corresponding figures are similar. In 1948, the British exported 12<br />
times more per capita than the Sub-Saharan countries, a proportion that grew to 44:1 in<br />
1988. For import, corresponding figures are 15:1 in 1948 <strong>and</strong> 56:1 in 1988. 10 Yet, Japan is<br />
considered to be the winner of this period of globalisation. Japan rose from war ruins to be<br />
an economic superpower. 11<br />
Fourth is the period after the 1980s that changed the globalisation process. 12 Firstly,<br />
a group of developing countries broke into the global markets. Among them are China,<br />
India, Malaysia, the Philippines, <strong>and</strong> Thail<strong>and</strong> as well as Argentina, Mexico <strong>and</strong> Turkey.<br />
Altogether, the population of these countries is more than three billion. Secondly, other<br />
developing countries became increasingly marginalised, especially in Africa. Thirdly, the<br />
Cold War ended. Russia <strong>and</strong> her former allies were absorbed into a United States<br />
8<br />
Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 79-141; <strong>and</strong> Woods, Ngaire, “<strong>International</strong> political economy in an age<br />
of globalization” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, pp. 278-282.<br />
9<br />
World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 28-31.<br />
10<br />
Rothgeb, John M. Jr., “The Changing <strong>International</strong> Context for Foreign Policy” in Neack, Laura, Hey,<br />
Jeanne A. K. <strong>and</strong> Haney, Patrick J. (eds.), Foreign Policy Analysis : Continuity <strong>and</strong> Change in its Second<br />
Generation (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1995), pp. 39-46.<br />
11<br />
Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries”, p. 44.<br />
12<br />
The era after 1980s is based on: World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 31-51; <strong>and</strong><br />
Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 236-239.<br />
23
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
dominated globalised economy. Fourthly, the globalised corporates <strong>and</strong> non-governmental<br />
actors increased in number <strong>and</strong> strength so much that they overshadowed states <strong>and</strong> raised<br />
questions of who was in charge; whether it was the big CEOs or the American politicians.<br />
Fifthly, is the renewed flow of migration <strong>and</strong> capital. During the first period of modern<br />
globalisation, about 10% of the world’s population was relocated. At the same time, there<br />
were few hindrances to international capital flow. These two phenomena have re-emerged<br />
with the reduction of control of capital flow <strong>and</strong> relocation of people. Approximately 120<br />
million people live in foreign countries. In that way, globalisation makes a web of personal<br />
strings around the world. These kind of connections <strong>and</strong> kinships stimulate international<br />
trade.<br />
The Forces Behind the <strong>Globalisation</strong> Processes<br />
Economic forces drive economic globalisation. According to the World Bank, the<br />
newcomer countries in the globalised economy, made their success almost by themselves.<br />
They helped their firms to break into industrial markets by improving infrastructure, skills<br />
<strong>and</strong> institutions, which modern production <strong>and</strong> marketing needed. 13 The marginalised<br />
countries have, according to the World Bank, bad infrastructure, poor education, rampant<br />
corruption, high trade barriers, <strong>and</strong> lack of adequate institutions. 14 Among African<br />
countries, the World Bank <strong>and</strong> IMF’s policy have had positive results in Ug<strong>and</strong>a in terms<br />
of economic growth, 15 <strong>and</strong> more or less collapsed in Zambia. 16<br />
13<br />
World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 32-38.<br />
14<br />
Ibid., pp. 38-41.<br />
15<br />
Leggett, Ian, Ug<strong>and</strong>a : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile (London:<br />
Oxfam/ Kampala: Fountain Publishers, 2001), pp. 5 <strong>and</strong> 60-62; <strong>and</strong> Datta-Mitra, Jayati (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a :<br />
Policy, Participation, People (Washington: The World Bank, 2001), pp. 3-7 <strong>and</strong> 13.<br />
16<br />
The report Zambia: Condemned to Debt, made by the London-based NGO World Development<br />
Movement, is referred to in: Suri, Sanjay, “How IMF, World Bank Brought Down Zambian Economy” in<br />
The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 7 th June, 2004.<br />
24
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
<strong>Globalisation</strong> subordinates liberal ideals <strong>and</strong> the state has to serve the economic<br />
interests even if these are against its own citizens. 17 As described by Richard Falk, Profes-<br />
sor Emeritus of <strong>International</strong> Law at Princeton University, <strong>and</strong> a well known critic to<br />
mainstream liberal global politics:<br />
“[globalization has] broken the social contract that was forged between state<br />
<strong>and</strong> society … global apartheid … adverse effects … insensitivity to human<br />
suffering … insufficient attention to ecological sustainability … polarization<br />
… marginalization … give government little political space. States are coopted<br />
or subordinated, weakening impulses to regulate on behalf of the<br />
common good.” 18<br />
This opinion is shared by those who claim that the globalisation process can be good if the<br />
starting point could be the needs of people <strong>and</strong> not of companies. 19 Similar is the theory on<br />
‘world-system’ attributed to Immanuel Wallerstein who described the world as core, peri-<br />
phery, <strong>and</strong> semi-periphery. 20 The core is the centre for capitalists, where they collect the<br />
surplus of their business. The raw materials are produced in the periphery where the labour<br />
is unsecured <strong>and</strong> underpaid. In the middle, is the semi-periphery where the welfare is low,<br />
however, states <strong>and</strong> people in this group benefit from the capitalists so that they contribute<br />
to stabilise the system. From Wallerstein’s point of view the globalised international<br />
system is developed to serve capitalist interests. 21 This picture of the world is adopted by<br />
several writers on mass media’s role in globalisation.<br />
The present stage of economic globalisation is made by the architects of American<br />
foreign policy. They have made a world order where the forces that resulted in world wars<br />
are removed. At the same time, the interests which benefit from that order are most of all<br />
17<br />
Petras, James <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Henry, Globalization Unmasked : Imperialism in the 21st Century (London:<br />
Fernwood Publishing, 2001), p. 12.<br />
18<br />
Falk, Richard, Predatory Globalization : A Critique, (Cambridge: Polity <strong>Press</strong>, 1999), cut from pp. 3, 15 <strong>and</strong> 71.<br />
19<br />
Mkapa, Benjamin <strong>and</strong> Halonen, Tarja, “<strong>Globalisation</strong> Can Work, the Question is: How?” in The East<br />
African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary,15 th March, 2004.<br />
20<br />
Smith, “Reflectivist <strong>and</strong> constructivist approaches to international theory”, p. 237; <strong>and</strong> Dunne, Tim:<br />
“Liberalism” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, p. 179.<br />
21<br />
Wallerstein, Immanuel, “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in Smith, Steve, Booth,<br />
Ken; <strong>and</strong> Zalewski, Marysia (eds.), <strong>International</strong> theory: positivism & beyond (Cambridge: Cambridge<br />
University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 87-107.<br />
25
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
located in the United States. 22 The system is wrapped up with concepts of American<br />
ideology. In that way, globalisation has led to a global American empire. 23<br />
That empire, according to Noam Chomsky, is full of contradictions between what<br />
the United States professes <strong>and</strong> what it practices at the global level. Noam Chomsky is a<br />
Professor of Linguistics at the Massachusetts <strong>Institute</strong> of Technology. The ‘war on terror’,<br />
he argues, is an excuse for forcing regimes to adapt an American friendly policy while the<br />
United States itself ‘is a leading practioner of international terrorism’. 24 On ‘human rights’,<br />
he notes that the United States gave aid to regimes in Latin America who tortured their<br />
citizens, 25 <strong>and</strong> that the media in the United States serve the American elite interests <strong>and</strong> in<br />
fact undermine democracy. 26<br />
Mass Media Involvement in <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Mass media in general are involved in globalisation in two ways. First are the mass media<br />
as global industry. Second are mass media as the core spreading democracy, shaping<br />
liberal world order <strong>and</strong> creating globally shared culture.<br />
The concept of ‘media globalisation’ or ‘global media’ means large cross-border<br />
flows of mass media content, growth of transnational media corporations, centralisation of<br />
media control, <strong>and</strong> a strong emphasis on the commercial side of media activities. 27 There is<br />
a distinction between the ‘medium’ <strong>and</strong> the process of ‘mass communication’. Media are<br />
instruments of that process. Any instrument that makes ‘mass’ communication can be<br />
22 Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 284-286.<br />
23 Petras <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Globalization Unmasked, pp. 61-73.<br />
24 Chomsky, Noam, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence; <strong>and</strong> foreign policy” in Review of<br />
<strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), p. 610.<br />
25 Chomsky, Noam, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity” in Evans, Tony (ed.), Human Rights Fifty<br />
Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), p. 27.<br />
26 Herring, Eric <strong>and</strong> Robinson, Piers, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news<br />
media <strong>and</strong> US foreign policy” in Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University<br />
<strong>Press</strong>, 2003), pp. 554-556.<br />
27 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 8.<br />
26
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
defined as a ‘mass medium’. 28 Even if mass media may have a broad meaning which<br />
includes even films, computer games <strong>and</strong> recorded music, the focus is on mass media with<br />
declared social purposes; such as newspapers, parts of radio <strong>and</strong> TV, <strong>and</strong> some magazines<br />
<strong>and</strong> books. Sometimes, these are also categorised as ‘news media’.<br />
How Mass Media Came to be a Globalised Industry<br />
A historical description of how mass media became a global business starts with the news<br />
agencies. During 1850s the Reuters (Britain), Havas 29 (France), <strong>and</strong> Wolff (in areas which<br />
became Germany) created a cartel. They divided functions for providing news from<br />
European colonies to the networks of newspapers in their countries. After some years, the<br />
American Associated <strong>Press</strong> (AP) <strong>and</strong> the rival United <strong>Press</strong>, joined the cartel. This is the<br />
origin of global production of content <strong>and</strong> the foundation of transnational media<br />
corporations. 30<br />
Then, the film industry took its global steps. Hollywood became quickly the<br />
world’s film capital. As early as 1914, 85% of the world’s film audience watched<br />
American films. That rose to 90% before “talkies” created language barriers, which<br />
resulted in a decline of the American film’s global share. However, links between Wall<br />
Street’s investments, Hollywood’s film projects, <strong>and</strong> a global market were established.<br />
British film industry, the sole global challenger to the American, was bought by<br />
Hollywood in the 1960s. 31<br />
Public radio dominated Europe from the earliest years <strong>and</strong> spread to other parts of<br />
the world. The new technology of short wave was introduced at the end of 1920s, <strong>and</strong><br />
removed the borders as limits of radio broadcasting. Radio became global, the whole world<br />
28 Hiebert, Ray Eldon <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Sheila Jean, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing World (London:<br />
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999), p. 23.<br />
29 Now renamed to Agence France <strong>Press</strong>e, AFP.<br />
30 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 12-13 <strong>and</strong> 18-19.<br />
31 Ibid., pp. 13-15 <strong>and</strong> 19.<br />
27
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
could be served from only one sender, <strong>and</strong> became a tool of ideological warfare. Soviet<br />
Union started, followed by the Nazi Germany, fascists in Italy, BBC, <strong>and</strong> Voice of<br />
America in spreading their propag<strong>and</strong>a worldwide. After 1945, shortwave radio became<br />
the Cold War’s arena for radio warfare. At its peak, 55 countries entered the shortwave<br />
arena with the BBC broadcasting in 46 languages. The Americans used the radio actively<br />
to support their operations in Latin America too. 32<br />
Recorded music grew close to radio as provider of content. The music industry was<br />
similar to the film industry, <strong>and</strong> music was included in large cross-media companies. Five<br />
firms have dominated this business <strong>and</strong> have the main share of global sale; the American<br />
CBS, Warner Brothers, <strong>and</strong> RCA, besides the British EMI <strong>and</strong> the Dutch PolyGram. 33<br />
Televison emerged as the most important new media technology in the postwar<br />
period. Very quickly, televisions were spread in the United States. As an industry, the large<br />
television companies faced strong regulations when those should grow globally. Even if<br />
those had bought shares in television companies abroad, regulations both at home <strong>and</strong> in<br />
countries which wanted to protect their own culture – or by other agendas – locked out the<br />
global TV industry. The door to globalisation of the television therefore became the pro-<br />
gramming, which met regulations too. The American television companies <strong>and</strong> the BBC<br />
took the dominance in two areas where they were permitted to operate, that was on news<br />
<strong>and</strong> sports. Hollywood’s film studios were allowed to take ‘the rest’. 34<br />
Among the different mass media, television is considered to be the one where<br />
interaction between content <strong>and</strong> commerce is developed to the higest level. Some examples<br />
which support this view are: Priority to programs which give commercials an attractive<br />
context <strong>and</strong> public; product placement in programs as ‘hidden promotion’; <strong>and</strong> finally how<br />
consumer ideology is introduced to the public, that creates like-minded consumer needs.<br />
32 Ibid., pp. 14-16.<br />
33 Ibid., pp. 18-20.<br />
34 Ibid., pp. 20-22.<br />
28
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Television gives them the perfect role as the connection between the commodity producer<br />
<strong>and</strong> its market. 35<br />
Newspapers were the earliest widespread mass media, but remain as the part of the<br />
media industry which is least integrated into the global system. 36 Foreign ownership in<br />
major newspapers is still relatively low. 37 The globalisation process has even, as a reaction,<br />
contributed to a wave of ‘localism’ that local media benefit from. 38 That trend is an<br />
advantage for newspapers. However, newspapers are completely included in the mass<br />
media’s transferring of news <strong>and</strong> influence around the world. Further, newspapers have<br />
often an élitist public <strong>and</strong> traditions that make this medium especially influential. 39<br />
Books grew as a mass medium where concentration of the publishing business was<br />
consolidated, but to a lesser degree than the film industry. In the early 1970s, the number<br />
of annual new titles in some countries were: the United States 80,000; United Kingdom<br />
40,000; France 30,000; Nigeria 1,316; <strong>and</strong> Kenya 224. India developed a significant book<br />
industry, yet a little export trade came from this industry. Later, the book industry came to<br />
be concentrated <strong>and</strong> linked to large global media corporations. 40<br />
The internet is the youngest widespread mass media which has achieved global<br />
penetration faster than any other media. However, the bias in access <strong>and</strong> use between the<br />
rich <strong>and</strong> the poor world is extreme. The internet is more complex than any other broad or<br />
narrow media. Internet represents the convergence between content, technology, <strong>and</strong><br />
communication. In that way the internet is the ultimate global roundabout of media from<br />
many points of view; content, users, owners, technology, politicians <strong>and</strong> sellers, with all its<br />
35<br />
Joyrich, Lynne: Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern Culture (Indianapolis:<br />
Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 9-14 <strong>and</strong> 169-175.<br />
36<br />
Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 12.<br />
37<br />
Islam, Roumeen, “Into the Looking Glass” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in<br />
Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 21.<br />
38<br />
United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media (Washington: U.S. Department<br />
of Commerce, 1993), pp. 215-217.<br />
39<br />
Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 16-18; <strong>and</strong> Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Exploring Mass Media for a<br />
Changing World, p. 141-142.<br />
40<br />
Ibid., pp. 19-20.<br />
29
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
threats <strong>and</strong> possibilities. The internet will, as other media, produce new winners <strong>and</strong> losers.<br />
How the internet will change political patterns is still too early to determine. 41<br />
From a functional point of view, globalisation of mass media has resulted in some<br />
key features. First, global media channels reach all the places on the globe. Second, even<br />
local media are influenced by globalism in its content, or ownership as well as through<br />
market forces. Third, a global audience has emerged <strong>and</strong> share a great part of common<br />
content <strong>and</strong> experiences, including commercials <strong>and</strong> the content’s underlying ideology.<br />
Fourth, the increased number of media have penetrated almost all everyday situations. The<br />
mass media’s variety has been developed to pluralism in all its dimensions. Fifth, the<br />
owners have grown in size, declined in numbers, <strong>and</strong> have constructed connections<br />
between different media which constitute great conglomerates with a large number of<br />
media. The result is a concentration of media control into few h<strong>and</strong>s. These are in the<br />
cores, in terms of the world-system theory. Sixth, crossconnections within media, conver-<br />
gence, <strong>and</strong> media connections to commodities have intertwined mass media together with<br />
each other, with communication technology <strong>and</strong> with other kinds of industry. Seventh, the<br />
bias between the rich <strong>and</strong> poor parts of the world in access <strong>and</strong> use of media is extensive.<br />
And finally, media have always played a political role. Emergence of global media<br />
increase the strengths to play a role in global politics, culture, <strong>and</strong> promotion.<br />
The forces which triggered the globalisation of mass media are the logic of econo-<br />
mic growth, similar to other globalised business. In media, growth in audience is the key to<br />
success. 42 Growth can emerge as ‘segment growth’ where target groups or the assortment<br />
of products are increased in specific market niches. Another is ‘vertical growth’ where, for<br />
instance, a film producer enter into cinemas <strong>and</strong> TV stations. The ‘geographical growth’ is<br />
41 Aronson, Jonathan D., “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet recolution” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization<br />
of World Politics, pp. 541-551; <strong>and</strong> Strömberg, David, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence”<br />
in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The<br />
World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 104.<br />
42 Strömberg, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence”, p. 96.<br />
30
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
to spread already established business geographically. 43 Even if the geographical direction<br />
is the globalisation issue, these kinds of growths support each other. 44 The advertisement<br />
industry’s need of global markets have also supported globalisation of mass media. Other<br />
forces behind globalisation of media have been migration, propag<strong>and</strong>a for political<br />
ideology, new technology <strong>and</strong> a more connected world in any ways.<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Spread of Democracy<br />
<strong>Globalisation</strong> spreads democracy as the st<strong>and</strong>ard of good governance. Democracy is<br />
associated with free press which is considered as a cornerstone of democratisation. 45<br />
Western democracies are influenced both by the libertarian system of the role of media as<br />
well as a sense of social responsibility <strong>and</strong> the capitalistic system. First, liberal ideals,<br />
which grew together with the development of the democracy in Western countries, ruled<br />
the press. 46 Then, after the Second World War, two trends resulted in the rise of a social<br />
responsibility view within the Western press. On one h<strong>and</strong>, the press was included in the<br />
optimistic democratic wave in the Western world immediately after the Second World<br />
War. The press took a key role in the building of these new democracies, <strong>and</strong> in the<br />
consolidation of existing democracies, 47 <strong>and</strong> at the same time became aware of its own<br />
increasing potential. A growth of sc<strong>and</strong>alous popular newspapers <strong>and</strong> purely entertaining<br />
mass media, such as radio <strong>and</strong> films, had squeezed the established press which became<br />
more concerned about its own role. 48<br />
43 Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries”, p. 22.<br />
44 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 40-45 <strong>and</strong> 54.<br />
45 Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes: A<br />
Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A<br />
Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 5 <strong>and</strong> 9.<br />
46 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 167-172.<br />
47 Righter, Rosemary, IPI: The Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part I:<br />
1951-1976 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988 [1976]), pp. 10-11 <strong>and</strong> 21.<br />
48 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 271-282.<br />
31
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
In the United States some of these aspects were picked up by the Hutchins<br />
Commission in 1947. It criticised sensational trends, examined the role of the press, <strong>and</strong><br />
came up with the concept of ‘social responsibility’. 49 Ideally, media’s social responsibility<br />
in a democracy is to influence economic, political <strong>and</strong> social outcomes to be the best for<br />
the citizens. 50 The debate on New World Information <strong>and</strong> Communication Order (NWICO)<br />
can be considered to be a global consequence of this trend of social responsibility. The last<br />
system, capitalism, increased its influence during the last decades. That system influenced<br />
the majority of media to make profit for the owners as the primary purpose, before the<br />
media can fulfill its social purposes. 51<br />
The idea of a democracy is the rule of the people. 52 A condition of such a broad<br />
involvement of people is the need for information. Since the government is supposed to act<br />
in the interests of its citizens, information is a public good that people need in order to<br />
participate in the democratic processes. The free media’s role is to gather <strong>and</strong> distribute<br />
information to ensure that the elected government works for its people. Open access to<br />
information ensures quality in debates <strong>and</strong> decision making processes resulting in the best<br />
politics for the public. Such openness <strong>and</strong> flow of information are essential parts of good<br />
governance. 53 While press freedom ensures independent information, a plurality of media<br />
actors will enhances the possibilities that each voice would have access to the public<br />
sphere even if each single channel is influenced by particular interests as they compete in<br />
the ‘marketplace of ideas’. This concept is based on John Stuart Mill’s philosophy. 54<br />
The information process in a democracy includes many actors beyond a free press.<br />
These may be opposition parties, a myriad of public interest organisations, as well as<br />
49<br />
Ibid., pp. 283-287.<br />
50<br />
Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, p. 21.<br />
51<br />
Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing World, pp. 45-49.<br />
52<br />
Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia, p. 271.<br />
53<br />
Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 27-43.<br />
54<br />
Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, p. 40.<br />
32
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
persistent individuals. These forces supposedly check the authorities, whether<br />
governments, private institutions, organisations <strong>and</strong> powerful individuals. Forces within<br />
the private corporate sector <strong>and</strong> the civil society have to be subjected to the same critical<br />
attention by media as government. 55<br />
Even within liberal philosophy, press freedom will come into conflict with other<br />
freedoms <strong>and</strong> values. These may, for instance, be need for secrecy; individual, institutional<br />
<strong>and</strong> national interests; <strong>and</strong> different ways to consider responsibility. 56 Therefore, press<br />
freedom has to be balanced with other freedoms or concerns. Such a ranking of press<br />
freedom against other concerns is what the whole process about implementing of press<br />
freedom is about.<br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> of expression, including freedom of the press, grew up together with ideas<br />
of the Enlightenment. 57 As a universal principle it found its way into the Human Rights<br />
Declaration by the United Nations at 1948. 58 Article 19 states that: “Everyone has the right<br />
to freedom of opinion <strong>and</strong> expression; this right includes freedom to hold opinions without<br />
interference <strong>and</strong> to seek, receive <strong>and</strong> import information <strong>and</strong> ideas through any media <strong>and</strong><br />
regardless of frontiers.” 59 However, due to the great degree of differences in traditions <strong>and</strong><br />
politics around the world, the power of the Human Rights article 19 is limited. Hence, the<br />
European Convention on Human Rights article 10 – with similar content – makes a<br />
55<br />
Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 40; <strong>and</strong> Dyck, Alex<strong>and</strong>er <strong>and</strong> Zingales, Luigi, “The Corporate<br />
Governance Role of the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), 107-111; <strong>and</strong><br />
Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, Lesson From the Fight Against Corruption (Nairobi: Transparency<br />
<strong>International</strong> – Kenya, 2001), pp. 12-13.<br />
56<br />
Miller, William L. “Introduction: Alternative values” in Miller, William L. (ed.), Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> :<br />
arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions (New York: Longman, 1995), pp. 1-17.<br />
57<br />
Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 101-102; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Martin, Den redigerende makt :<br />
Redaktørrollens norske historie (Kristians<strong>and</strong>, Norway: IJ-forlaget, 2000), p. 115.<br />
58<br />
United Nations, Basic Facts About the United Nations (New York: United Nations, 2000), pp. 216-217.<br />
59<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: “Fundamentals”, http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Fundamentals ,<br />
downloaded 28 th March, 2005. WPFC’s homepage: http://www.wpfc.org/<br />
33
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
stronger protection of these freedoms than the universal declaration. The reason is that the<br />
European countries have a more homogeneous history than other parts in the world. 60<br />
The United States dominates how concepts such as democracy <strong>and</strong> press freedom<br />
are interpreted around the world. Characteristic values of the American society are<br />
optimism, action, belief in progress, growth <strong>and</strong> science, as well as education as the key to<br />
the future. In such a value system, the press have a prominent role <strong>and</strong> is a strong<br />
instrument of power with a great potential for good. 61 In the United States political <strong>and</strong><br />
commercial interests benefit from global spreading of American values, supported by the<br />
mass media.<br />
Mass media produce or influence a society’s shared experience <strong>and</strong> underst<strong>and</strong>ing.<br />
Even if a medium can have objectivity as a declared goal, this is difficult. The whole<br />
process of deciding policy, selecting focus, selecting information, presentation, <strong>and</strong><br />
distribution are all influenced by someone’s subjective opinion. That ‘someone’ is the<br />
force that rules the actual medium. In that way, media are a main source for a community’s<br />
ideology. Despite the media’s plurality, the interests of a few are the determining factor. If<br />
all the dominating mass media are streamlined according to their interests, then, the public<br />
opinion is not a result of plural impulses by the media, but a result of many media impulses<br />
similarly lopsided by the same interests. Such kind of systematically lopsided information<br />
will sway the ideology in the same direction. 62<br />
Theories about mass media in terms of ideological hegemony were made by<br />
Marxist critics such as T. W. Adorno, Max Horkheimer, <strong>and</strong> Herbert Marcuse. They claim<br />
that mass media have risen under capitalism <strong>and</strong> mass media have been instruments of<br />
commodification. Mass media have created a mass culture that successfully channels<br />
desire into a commodity structure, manipulates the audience’s sense of needs, <strong>and</strong><br />
60<br />
Eggen, Kyrre, Ytringsfrihet : Vernet om ytringsfriheten i norsk rett (Oslo: Cappelen, 2002) , pp. 136-138.<br />
61<br />
Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, p. 238.<br />
62<br />
Briggs, Adam <strong>and</strong> Cobley, Paul (eds.), The Media: An Introduction (Essex: Longman, 1998), pp. 277-282.<br />
34
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
homogenises pleasure. In that way commercial interests have determined the logic of mass<br />
media because they provide the mass media’s income. That process includes more than<br />
commercials <strong>and</strong> advertisements. The whole underlying ideology imparted through the<br />
editorial content, the programs, films, <strong>and</strong> music, will together influence the public’s<br />
feelings of needs as consumers. Simultaneously, these media have offered a perfect<br />
occasion for its advertisers’ messages. In that way, the mass media create a consumer<br />
ideology that creates markets <strong>and</strong> supports the advertisers commercial interests far beyond<br />
the actual advertisement, claim these critics. 63<br />
Economic globalisation include spreading of democracy including press freedom.<br />
The economic interests behind globalisation expect the democracy to not only be good for<br />
its citizens, but also to give commercial business the best conditions possible. Regarding<br />
the public, the idea is that economic growth will provide everyone with improved welfare.<br />
That is the theory, the practical experience gives another record where the gap between<br />
rich <strong>and</strong> poor is widening. However, due to such a philosophy, spreading democracy<br />
means advancing the interests of those behind economic globalisation. 64 It is here where<br />
press freedom comes in. The dilemma is that spreading of press freedom conducted by the<br />
interests behind globalisation is similar to spreading of business freedom. That is not<br />
identical with press freedom in terms of social responsibility.<br />
Jürgen Habermas is concerned with media <strong>and</strong> global aspects of democracy. He is<br />
Professor Eremitus at the University of Frankfurt, <strong>and</strong> Professor of Philosophy at<br />
Northwestern University in the United States. He emphasises the contradiction between<br />
democracy limited to state borders, when the economic <strong>and</strong> cultural forces work globally.<br />
His theory on ‘radical democracy’ says that state borders are obstacles for democratic<br />
63 Joyrich, Re-Viewing Reception, pp. 22-26 <strong>and</strong> 33.<br />
64 Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 21-22.<br />
35
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
rights. He recognises media’s role in global democracy, but has a critical approach to<br />
whose interests media actually are serving. 65<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom as means of democracy or human rights has been criticised. One<br />
problem can be a narrow underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom, for instance freedom to publish<br />
without free access to information. Despite declared press freedom, such a practice is a<br />
sabotage of public’s right to know, a condition for freedom of expression. 66 Or as stated by<br />
the Malaysian foreign minister Abdullah Badawi at the summit of the Association of<br />
South-East Asian Nations (ASEAN) in 1998: “Too much freedom could destroy<br />
democracy.” 67 Several regimes have developed press freedom instruments such as ‘code of<br />
ethics’ <strong>and</strong> a ‘national press council’ in democratisation processes. However, the purpose<br />
for using these terms has been to get recognition by the dominant countries in the<br />
international community, but not necessarily to increase the practice of press freedom. 68<br />
Another problem can be that the press has freedom, but do not use it to fulfil demo-<br />
cratic goals. The media are described as gatekeepers for the public debate. 69 The issue is<br />
about what guiding principles determine media’s performance, is it social responsibility or<br />
profit? In this case, Noam Chomsky stated that “in relatively free societies without state<br />
controls, the sinister fact is that censorship is largely voluntary.” 70 That means that press<br />
freedom is established, but is not utilised to all its limits to achieve democratic goals.<br />
65 Habermas, Jürgen, “Toward a Cosmopolitian Europe” in Journal of Democracy (Baltimore: The Johns<br />
Hopkins University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 14, number 4, pp. 86-100; <strong>and</strong> Hobden, Stephen <strong>and</strong> Jones,<br />
Richard Wyn, “Marxist theories of <strong>International</strong> Relations” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization<br />
of World Politics, pp. 214-216.<br />
66 Linard, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media, pp. 15-17.<br />
67 Kunczik, Michael, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?” in Kunczik, Michael<br />
(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-<br />
Stiftung, 1999), p. 256.<br />
68 Moisy, Claude, ”Imposing Code of Ethics for Journalists : Less Innocent Than They Might Seem” in The<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern Labels for Curbs on the<br />
<strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 2002), pp. 5-6.<br />
69 Richardson, Brian, “The Public’s Right to Know: A Dangerous Notion” in Journal of Mass Media Ethics<br />
(New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19, number 1-2004, pp. 52.<br />
70 Chomsky, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity”, p. 25.<br />
36
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Concerning human rights, a purpose of press freedom is to protect all the other<br />
human rights. 71 However, many countries even reject that human rights are universal. 72<br />
More than 120 new states have come into being since the Universal Declaration of Human<br />
Rights of 1948. From Asia <strong>and</strong> Africa it is argued that the emphasis on individual rights is<br />
inappropriate. 73 Some of these poor countries have even refused to approve some of the<br />
United Nations’ conventions concerning free media. They consider these to be<br />
arrangements which further consolidate Western media as means for dominance over poor<br />
countries. 74<br />
An effect of globalisation is a separation between principles of human rights <strong>and</strong> its<br />
realisation. That means that the principles of these freedoms <strong>and</strong> rights have spread but<br />
adverse effects of globalisation have hindered realisation. 75 Regarding global governance,<br />
press freedom concerns democracy, social responsibility <strong>and</strong> human rights. In<br />
globalisation, economic forces have moved from state to global level. The political power,<br />
however, remains mainly at state level. The United Nations or any other has not achieved<br />
position to conduct a strong global governance. 76 In states, it is expected that press freedom<br />
is cornerstone of good governance in public as well as in private sector. 77 When it comes to<br />
global governance, global media seem not to use press freedom to carry out social<br />
responsibility to fulfil universal human rights. This is because the global ruling elites are<br />
71<br />
An-na’im, Abdulla, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right” in Willie Musarurwa<br />
Memorial Trust, Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong><br />
Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), p. 24.<br />
72<br />
Kunczik, Michael, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, in Kunczik, Michael<br />
(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-<br />
Stiftung, 1999), p. 7.<br />
73<br />
Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 255-256.<br />
74<br />
Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 185.<br />
75<br />
McGrew, Anthomy, “Human rights in a global age: coming to terms with globalisation” in Evans, Tony (ed.),<br />
Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 188-189.<br />
76<br />
Falk, Predatory Globalization, p. 61.<br />
77<br />
Dyck <strong>and</strong> Zingales, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media”, p. 135.<br />
37
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
powerful enough to manipulate press freedom <strong>and</strong> universal human rights to serve their<br />
interests. 78<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> as a Universal Concept<br />
Concepts such as ‘democracy’ <strong>and</strong> ‘press freedom’ do not come up or spread by<br />
themselves, they are formualted <strong>and</strong> promoted by competing forces pushing their particular<br />
interests. When globalisation spreads press freedom, questions arise as to who defines,<br />
pursues <strong>and</strong> practises press freedom as a universal concept. According to constructivism<br />
theory, these questions are discussed with attention to global regimes, agents for press<br />
freedom, <strong>and</strong> how circumstances constitute good conditions for press freedom.<br />
<strong>International</strong> Regimes on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Regimes on press freedom are for instance legal conventions, institutions or NGOs which<br />
have gained authority to decide or influence in such matters. A clear regime on press<br />
freedom is maintained by the United Nations. The Secretary-General Kofi A. Annan<br />
formulated the present universal notion of press freedom as: “A free press is one of the<br />
most essential components of a democratic society, which in turn is a prerequisite for<br />
sustainable social <strong>and</strong> economic development.” The United Nations has also declared 3 rd<br />
May every year to be observed as the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day. 79<br />
Article 19 in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948 deals with<br />
freedom of information. Its roots are in the 17 th century Enlightenment <strong>and</strong> ideals<br />
associated with the development of Western democracies. After 1948, the United Nations<br />
developed more details on conditions for press freedom. These include the Convention on<br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> of Information as well as The Convention on the <strong>International</strong> Transmission of<br />
78 An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, p. 25.<br />
79 United Nations, “Joint Message for World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day 3 May 2001”. A leaflet published by United<br />
Nations, UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> UN High Commissioner for Human Rights.<br />
38
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
News <strong>and</strong> the Convention on the <strong>International</strong> Right of Correction. 80 In this way the United<br />
Nations played a leading role in formulating <strong>and</strong> implementing an international regime on<br />
press freedom. On this basis even strong regional regimes, such as the European Con-<br />
vention on Human Rights, are constituted. 81<br />
The United Nations is influenced heavily by the United States. The philosophy of<br />
the Enlightenment had a great impact on American thinking about journalism <strong>and</strong> press<br />
freedom. 82 In the era of globalisation under the United States’ hegemony, the American<br />
version of these freedom ideals has been spread. Article 19 in the Universal Declaration of<br />
Human Rights upholds similar ideals as those for press freedom in the United States.<br />
In several ways the United States is a chief actor in forming <strong>and</strong> spreading press<br />
freedom globally. American actors have been substantial donors to campaigns <strong>and</strong> NGOs<br />
concerning global spread of press freedom. 83 American media practice has influenced<br />
similar development in other countries, for instance regarding the Fourth Estate role <strong>and</strong><br />
commercialisation. Notions of the press as the Fourth Estate in its role as watchdog<br />
emerged first in the United States. The mainstream American view has regarded an<br />
independent press to be in an adversarial role to government, 84 that is widely accepted as<br />
the model which serves democracies best. 85<br />
Americans have also spearheaded commercialisation of media. In the United States<br />
the view has been that only a market-based press can be independent <strong>and</strong> play a<br />
democratically legitimate role. 86 Recent debates on American media claim that ideals such<br />
80 Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, pp. 179-184.<br />
81 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-71; <strong>and</strong> Carver, Richard, Coliver, S<strong>and</strong>ra, Lauriciano, Gil,<br />
Lush, David <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Adewale, Who Rules the Airwaves : Broadcasting in Africa (London:<br />
Article 19 <strong>and</strong> Index on Censorship, 1995), pp. 23-27.<br />
82 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 31-64.<br />
83 Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp. 29, 107, 111, 147 <strong>and</strong> 162 points out Ford Foundation, Rockefeller<br />
Foundation, Carnegie Endowment for <strong>International</strong> Peace <strong>and</strong> 20 American newspapers, as examples.<br />
84 Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, pp. 248-251.<br />
85 Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 2-5.<br />
86 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 24.<br />
39
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
as social responsibility <strong>and</strong> a free marketplace of ideas have lost value since the chief goal<br />
has been to create <strong>and</strong> attract a large audience for advertisers, to gain profit. 87 Acceptance<br />
of claims that media have to be successful businesses in order to play a political <strong>and</strong><br />
cultural role, <strong>and</strong> to support economic development, 88 illustrate how the Americans define<br />
<strong>and</strong> globally influence notions of press freedom being markets as bases for independence.<br />
Despite the United States’ high democratic profile, there are times when press<br />
freedom is in conflict with interests of the political elites. 89 An example is the treatment of<br />
journalists in the war in Iraq in which journalists were embedded or had to be licensed to<br />
be in the Iraqi war zone. A study on the practice from March to May, 2003, concluded that<br />
there were a vast number of press freedom violations by the United States led coalition that<br />
targeted non-embedded journalists for harassment <strong>and</strong> confiscation of equipment. These<br />
journalists were fired upon <strong>and</strong> even deported. An American general pointed out that only<br />
embedded journalists would receive protection which contradicts the 1949 Geneva<br />
Convention as well as human rights. 90<br />
Agents are individuals, insitutions or forces which promote regimes. Among agents<br />
promoting regimes on press freedom, attention is given to the World Bank, NGOs, media<br />
ethics <strong>and</strong> education. First, the World Bank <strong>and</strong> IMF spread the United Nations’ <strong>and</strong> the<br />
United States’ global regimes on press freedom. The World Bank’s contribution, in<br />
particular, is spreading of the neo-liberal notion of press freedom in countries the bank is<br />
involved with <strong>and</strong> claims that press freedom supports development. ‘Development<br />
87<br />
Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, p. 253; <strong>and</strong> Real, Michael R., Exploring<br />
Media Culture : A Guide (New Delhi: Sage Publications, 1996), p. 148.<br />
88<br />
Owen, Bruce M., “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications” in World Bank,<br />
The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />
Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 167-168.<br />
89<br />
Herring <strong>and</strong> Robinson, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news media <strong>and</strong> US<br />
foreign policy”, pp. 554-555.<br />
90<br />
Leaper, Glenn W., Löwstedt, Anthony <strong>and</strong> Madhoun, Husam, Caught in the Crossfire: The Iraq War <strong>and</strong> the<br />
Media – A Diary of Claims <strong>and</strong> Counterclaims (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), pp. 75-77.<br />
40
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
journalism’ was promoted by poor countries, a notion where media were supposed to<br />
support development efforts <strong>and</strong> its authorities.<br />
The World Bank’s ‘development journalism’ is quite the opposite <strong>and</strong> is based on<br />
the philosophy of liberalism. From this view the mass media provide a voice to people,<br />
improve transparency <strong>and</strong> reduce authorities’ scope to act on other interests than its<br />
citizens’. 91 Beyond these democratic <strong>and</strong> development arguments emphasis is on how<br />
media need to be based on market economy to ensure independence. 92 The World Bank<br />
presumes that press freedom compensates lack of good governance even in private<br />
sector. 93 Hence, press freedom supports liberal democratisation globally, partly<br />
independence of states.<br />
Second, a web of international NGOs act as press freedom agents. Some of them<br />
have even developed own regimes in accordance with the United Nation’s press freedom<br />
regime. 94 These NGOs constitute a global press freedom movement. They are advocating,<br />
monitoring <strong>and</strong> influencing practices on press freedom around the world. Further, as a<br />
network these NGOs connect institutions <strong>and</strong> professionals concerned with press<br />
freedom. 95 The efforts are to some extent coordinated by the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Committee based in Virginia in the United States. 96 WPFC acts as international umbrella<br />
organisation for 45 NGOs “united in the defense <strong>and</strong> promotion of press freedom”. 97 Most<br />
of the NGOs concerned with press freedom are based in the United States or Europe. Some<br />
of them have status as partners or observers with the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO. Hence,<br />
NGOs also establish relations between the media industry <strong>and</strong> governments.<br />
91<br />
Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, p. 1; <strong>and</strong> Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 27.<br />
92<br />
Owen, “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications”, pp. 167-168.<br />
93<br />
Dyck <strong>and</strong> Zingales, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media”, pp. 109 <strong>and</strong> 135.<br />
94<br />
Becker, Vlad <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical Report, pp. 1-15.<br />
95<br />
Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 187.<br />
96<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, “Contact us”, http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Contact,<br />
downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />
97<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, “Welcome to the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee”<br />
http://www.wpfc.org/, downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />
41
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
An example of interaction between media industry, NGOs <strong>and</strong> the United Nations<br />
is how UNESCO in 1947 proposed an ‘international institute of press <strong>and</strong> information’.<br />
That one should fulfil a policy where the press worked responsibly <strong>and</strong> supported<br />
democratisation. The press adapted the idea but refused that it should be subordinated to<br />
any body connected to governments. To ensure this request for independence, UNESCO<br />
left it to the press itself. Then the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> was established as an NGO.<br />
Today, IPI is an authority on global press freedom. 98<br />
Third, harmonising of media ethics reduces press freedom to a narrow but powerful<br />
concept. Beyond laws, codes of conduct make up the framework for practices. Common<br />
points on media ethics include responsibility, independence, human rights, tolerance, truth,<br />
professional confidence <strong>and</strong> privacy. 99 There is also proposed a move from codes of ethics<br />
over to universal ethical principles. The message is how social responsibility should be<br />
interpreted by media in a globalised world. 100 In the same spirit ‘democracy’ is emphasised<br />
as such a universal value which should be the basis of all journalism. These calls for ethics<br />
of ‘democratic journalism’ invoke universal validity. 101<br />
Fourth, journalism education <strong>and</strong> professionalisation of the industry is also<br />
supposed to narrow <strong>and</strong> strengthen press freedom. It has been common to argue for better<br />
qualified journalists as well as professional norms which harmonise behaviour. 102<br />
Education institutions make up an international web. When press freedom is established as<br />
a cornerstone of the press’ role, these schools implement press freedom as a shared notion<br />
among journalists globally. For that reason Western actors have supported development of<br />
98<br />
Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp 24-26; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years :<br />
The Story of the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1962), p. 11; <strong>and</strong> The<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000 : <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000), p. 3.<br />
99<br />
Kunczik, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, p. 20.<br />
100<br />
Christians, Clifford <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, “Social Responsibility Worldvide” in Journal of Mass<br />
Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume 19, number 1, pp. 13-15.<br />
101<br />
Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 264-268.<br />
102 Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, 140 <strong>and</strong> 145-149; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 91-93.<br />
42
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
journalism schools in poor countries. 103 Journalism schools focus on reporting <strong>and</strong> writing.<br />
The World Bank has pointed out the need of education in business <strong>and</strong> management of<br />
media to support implementation of press freedom in poor countries. That will strengthen<br />
media to operate as independent actors in a free market environment. 104<br />
Professionalisation <strong>and</strong> harmonised education can be in contradiction with<br />
liberalism <strong>and</strong> the ‘marketplace of ideas’. More like-minded journalists narrows media’s<br />
ability to expose plurality. From the South, a viewpoint is that Western ideas remain<br />
dominant in such a harmonised practice of journalism. 105<br />
Circumstances are created to support the development <strong>and</strong> spread of international<br />
regimes on press freedom in four ways. These are market economy, global culture, civil<br />
society <strong>and</strong> legitimacy. First, liberal market economy is the policy behind globalisation.<br />
The major points are how globalisation of mass media <strong>and</strong> the economic globalisation are<br />
intertwined, <strong>and</strong> how global media support other globalised business. For media itself,<br />
liberal market economy means deregulation, privatisation <strong>and</strong> a commercial purpose.<br />
These are considered to be bases for independence <strong>and</strong> freedom. 106 Then, to gain freedom<br />
media have to be run just like any other business. Outputs that give media income are<br />
content <strong>and</strong> audience. The goal will be growth in audience <strong>and</strong> circulation which are<br />
media’s key to business success. Common interests between media <strong>and</strong> advertisers<br />
constitute a partnership with other industries. 107 If local markets are capable, media can<br />
103<br />
Eikje, Ove, “God journalistikk er en vaktbikkje” in Dagen (Bergen, Norway: Dagbladet Dagen), news<br />
article, 18 th February, 2004.<br />
104<br />
Carrington, Tim <strong>and</strong> Nelson, Mark, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics” in World Bank,<br />
The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />
Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 244-245.<br />
105<br />
Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “Values, st<strong>and</strong>ards <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism: The way forward for subsaharan<br />
Africa” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya<br />
(Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), p. 187.<br />
106<br />
Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 38-40; <strong>and</strong> Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition:<br />
The Hegemony of Economics”, p. 226.<br />
107<br />
Owen, “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications”, pp. 167-172.<br />
43
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
achieve economic independence from governments <strong>and</strong> achieve press freedom. However,<br />
at the same time these media are subordinated to impact from market logics.<br />
Second, global culture works supportively for global press freedom. There are<br />
interactions among cultures, media <strong>and</strong> identity. Culture can be understood as how the life<br />
is formulated in symbols, <strong>and</strong> how these symbols structure context. Then, media is the<br />
technology that carries this culture. Identity is how self-images are made in this context of<br />
media culture. 108 Hegemony is how one group can maintain power or dominance over<br />
other groups. Global media maintain such a hegemony, <strong>and</strong> these are based in the West.<br />
Hence, development of a global culture supports a global hegemony. In the framework of<br />
commercialisation, culture is big business for global media. Culture as sport, films,<br />
entertainment <strong>and</strong> music constitute a major part of content in mass media. Men <strong>and</strong> women<br />
in this culture are important actors in news. When this culture is shared globally, the<br />
markets for media are global. Global mass media make culture to be global culture, <strong>and</strong><br />
make global culture to be business. 109 The industry of global culture gets the biggest profit<br />
if media are free <strong>and</strong> based on liberal market economy. Hence, global culture is a force<br />
which supports such a notion of global press freedom.<br />
Third, empowerment of civil society supports press freedom. Due to the watchdog<br />
role, it is not expected that governments will be a front runner for press freedom. Media<br />
<strong>and</strong> civil society made up a counterweight to power of state <strong>and</strong> politicians. According to<br />
Jürgen Habermas, communities have to recognise how journalism has a function as public<br />
good, that democracy lives in civil society, <strong>and</strong> that media make a culture of dialogue<br />
possible. 110 The neoliberal policy spread by globalisation emphasises importance of civil<br />
society <strong>and</strong> a reduced role to state <strong>and</strong> government. If power is decentralised, an<br />
108 Real, Exploring Media Culture, p. 35.<br />
109 Ibid., pp. 148-150, 168 <strong>and</strong> 249-253.<br />
110 Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 255.<br />
44
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
empowered civil society ensures accountability <strong>and</strong> transparency. 111 Mass media free from<br />
government control enable the civil society to take this enlarged position. 112<br />
Fourth, legitimacy is necessary for rulers <strong>and</strong> media are legitimising tools.<br />
Government achieve legitimacy among citizens by having a free <strong>and</strong> vibrant press which<br />
people know the press to be free <strong>and</strong> transparent. Hence, a democratic government <strong>and</strong><br />
democratic decision processes achieve public support <strong>and</strong> confidence. 113 In authoritarian<br />
regimes media are turned to cement the existing power <strong>and</strong> legitimise the rulers both<br />
domestic <strong>and</strong> abroad. As in ‘development journalism’, institutions as education <strong>and</strong> media<br />
were used to legitimise the hegemony of the ruling class. 114 In a democracy, media build<br />
support for the state system itself even if the actual government is critisised <strong>and</strong> maybe<br />
lose next election.<br />
Debates on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
The global spread of press freedom has became controversial from three perspectives.<br />
First, is the question of global media’s dominant position. Second, is on how the<br />
development agenda connects media with economic globalisation. Third are some African<br />
perspectives on press freedom.<br />
First, global media have grown to take a dominant position in the present world<br />
order. Due to concentration of ownership, even a few media companies dominate global<br />
media. The table below presents the annual turnover for the biggest global media<br />
111<br />
Litvack, Jennie <strong>and</strong> Seddon, Jessica, Decentralization Briefing Notes (Washington: The World Bank<br />
<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000), pp. 97-99.<br />
112<br />
Besley, Timothy, Burgess, Robin <strong>and</strong> Prat, Andrea, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Political Accountability” in World<br />
Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />
Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 45-46, 49-50 <strong>and</strong> 58-59.<br />
113<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, p. 63.<br />
114<br />
Abubakar, Dauda, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa” in Domatob,<br />
Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society (Nairobi: The<br />
African Council on Communication Education, 1987), pp. 53-59.<br />
45
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
conglomerates. The comparison with some countries’ gross domestic product is meant to<br />
illustrate the largeness of such global media companies.<br />
Size: Media business compared with some states<br />
Media company Annual sales 115 Country Gross domestic<br />
product (2003) 116<br />
Time Warner US$ 38 billion (2003) Vietnam US$ 39 billion<br />
Disney US$ 31 billion (2004) Slovakia US$ 32 billion<br />
Bertelsmann US$ 21 billion (2003) Kenya + Ug<strong>and</strong>a +<br />
Tanzania altogether<br />
US$ 30 billion<br />
News Corporation US$ 20 billion (2004) Syria US$ 21 billion<br />
In accordance with Wallerstein’s world-system theory, concentration of the mass<br />
media located to so-called cores, is similar to the economic globalisation process. These<br />
patterns of growth, dominance <strong>and</strong> concentration have also emerged at regional <strong>and</strong><br />
national levels as well as in market niches independent of geography. Smaller <strong>and</strong> regional<br />
media conglomerates are intertwined with, influenced by, dependent on, or copies of the<br />
greatest global companies. 117 For these companies spread of press freedom act as spread of<br />
a harmonised practice which is friendly to media business.<br />
When media business as well as media practice are controlled by a few, it can be<br />
claimed that press freedom is used to maintain a hegemony of ruling classes. This critique<br />
is not directed at press freedom itself, but at how manipulative forces influence <strong>and</strong><br />
formulate press freedom to benefit themselves. That is illustrated here through examining<br />
of how elites control the role of media in societies, how market economy influence mass<br />
media to operate <strong>and</strong> think similarly, how mass media support economic globalisation <strong>and</strong><br />
115 Hoover’s Inc.: http://www.hoovers.com/. This is homepage for search in Hoover’s database of 12 million<br />
companies. Search of the actual companies were downloaded 12 th January, 2005.<br />
116 The World Bank, World Development Indicators database: http://devdata.worldbank.org/data-query/<br />
Further comparison: GDP in 2003 in US$ billion: Ug<strong>and</strong>a 6, Tanzania 10, Kenya 14, Denmark 212,<br />
Norway 222, <strong>and</strong> Sweden 301.<br />
117 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 70; <strong>and</strong> Herman, Edward S., “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in<br />
the United States” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development<br />
(Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 61.<br />
46
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
create a global culture, the United States’ role, how mass media legitimate <strong>and</strong> stabilise<br />
existing political systems, the NWICO debates <strong>and</strong> effects of new technology.<br />
The role media play in societies can be controlled by the few dominant owners to<br />
protect their interests. In this sense free press is more a myth than reality. 118 When the<br />
mighty <strong>and</strong> powerful appear as strong defenders of press freedom, 119 they defend their<br />
interests given that ruling ideas have always been ideas of the ruling class. 120 An effect is<br />
that despite growth in media channels, sources have been concentrated <strong>and</strong> the range of<br />
views <strong>and</strong> ideas has narrowed. 121 Hence, the growth in the number of media <strong>and</strong> channels<br />
has not resulted in democratic or ideological plurality. 122 In accordance with the owners<br />
interests, an informal filter system for media content ensures that the interests of the cores’<br />
elites prevail. 123 The concept of marketplace of ideas as a basis for press freedom has been<br />
turned to a marketplace for content to attract audiences for advertising purposes. 124 The<br />
‘broadcasting’ has been ‘narrowcasting’, expressed in terms of television. 125<br />
To maintain the present liberal world order, mass media <strong>and</strong> press freedom are<br />
intertwined with free trade <strong>and</strong> democratisation. Thus, the purpose for a free press is to<br />
support markets because social matters have to be solved by markets. 126 In this context a<br />
market based mass media system is regarded as the best protection for freedom of expres-<br />
118<br />
Parenti, Michael, Inventing Reality : The Politics of the Mass Media (New York: St. Martin’s <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
1986), pp. 27, 50 <strong>and</strong> 236-238.<br />
119<br />
For instance Ted Turner, Vice-Chairman of Time Warner in: van der Heijden, Barend <strong>and</strong> Tahzib-Lie,<br />
Bahia, Reflections in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights : A fiftieth Anniversary Anthology (The<br />
Hague: Martinius Nijhoff Publishers, 1998), p. 299.<br />
120<br />
Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, p. 55.<br />
121<br />
Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The<br />
Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), p. 33; <strong>and</strong> Paterson, Chris, “Global<br />
Battlefields” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New<br />
Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), p. 79.<br />
122<br />
Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies”, pp. 19-33.<br />
123 Herring <strong>and</strong> Robinson, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news media <strong>and</strong> US<br />
foreign policy”, pp. 554-556; <strong>and</strong> Chomsky, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence, <strong>and</strong> foreign<br />
policy”, pp. 605-620; <strong>and</strong> Allan, Stuart, News Culture (Philadelphia: Open University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp.<br />
57-60.<br />
124 Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, pp. 253-254.<br />
125 Joyrich: Re-Viewing Reception, pp. 10 <strong>and</strong> 17.<br />
126 Herman, “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in the United States”, pp. 61, 70-73 <strong>and</strong> 78.<br />
47
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
sion 127 where media are not accountable to other powers except markets. 128 Extensive<br />
deregulation of media is part of this broader liberal globalisation agenda. 129 A function of<br />
global media is also to integrate new states into the global commerce system. 130 In this way<br />
press freedom has been used as agent for economic globalisation.<br />
Global culture spread by global media is another way of maintaining hegemony. On<br />
one h<strong>and</strong>, globally shared images create a global culture. Among the effects is a shared<br />
notion of what kind of society peoples want in terms of values <strong>and</strong> material needs. On the<br />
other h<strong>and</strong>, like-minded consumers are created, which benefits global markets. 131 Despite<br />
press freedom, more than 99.999% of the world’s population have no access to audiences<br />
because they are receivers <strong>and</strong> not senders in the mass media communication model. 132<br />
Hence, a shared culture, the technology <strong>and</strong> the exclusive access to influence media’s<br />
content, all of these support the existing hegemony. An effect of global culture is also how<br />
mass media’s streamlining of a mass culture results in reduced diversity in the cultural<br />
‘ecology’. Stronger impulses erode the weaker cultures, <strong>and</strong> global mass media are accused<br />
of reducing cultural plurality. 133<br />
Cultural <strong>and</strong> ideological narrowing as an effect of global media is not by accident.<br />
That is, in fact, declared American policy, according to the United States’ Department of<br />
Commerce, which writes:<br />
“Since the founding of the republic, the mass media industry has held a<br />
special place in American society. The products of this industry – films,<br />
video <strong>and</strong> radio programming, <strong>and</strong> recorded music, as well as books,<br />
magazines, <strong>and</strong> newspapers – provide the vehicles through which ideas,<br />
127<br />
Allan, News Culture, p. 49.<br />
128<br />
Okonkwo, Ifeanyi Edward, “Journalists in a Developing Economy” in Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting<br />
Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education, 1994), p. 10.<br />
129<br />
Gunther <strong>and</strong> Mughan, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes”, p. 14.<br />
130<br />
Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, pp. 3, 8, 10 <strong>and</strong> 15.<br />
131<br />
Real, Exploring Media Culture, pp. 3, 18-20 <strong>and</strong> 148.<br />
132<br />
Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, p. 11.<br />
133<br />
Oluoch, Fred, “Is <strong>Globalisation</strong> Eroding Our Culture?” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />
news article, 29 th December, 2003; <strong>and</strong> World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 129-130.<br />
48
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
images, <strong>and</strong> information are dispersed across the United States <strong>and</strong><br />
throughout the world.” 134<br />
This policy serves both political <strong>and</strong> economic ends in the United States. Due to American<br />
media’s influence on the whole world, all business elites with shared interests benefit from<br />
this policy.<br />
To legitimise <strong>and</strong> stabilise existing political order can be another purpose of press<br />
freedom. A problem that arises is whether these media are true in their criticism or if the<br />
criticism is modest not to jeopardise an existing order that media benefit from. 135 When an<br />
issue is covered <strong>and</strong> opponents <strong>and</strong> experts on all sides are interviewed, the given image is<br />
a critical coverage. In reality, however, arguments which do not fit into the case, or<br />
opponents who are critical are left out of the debate. In that way, the press cultivate debates<br />
within a mainstream framework. Such debates sound critical <strong>and</strong> legitimate decision<br />
processes. In this way an effect of “critical journalism” can be to hide important views.<br />
Hence, the press contributes to support an existing system. Globally, international news<br />
media create similar legitimising conditions for the current world order. 136<br />
When the purpose for press freedom is to maintain the existing system, press<br />
freedom can be subordinated to other considerations. An example of this logic is how press<br />
freedom has been subordinated to regulations to support war on terrorism. It has been<br />
justified by the purpose which is to protect democracy. In that way press freedom has been<br />
subordinated to protection of democracy as a superior purpose. 137<br />
The NWICO debates in the 1970s <strong>and</strong> 80s, illustrate an early resistance to how<br />
global media support rich countries. 138 Among poor countries a sense of being excluded<br />
134<br />
United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media, p. 1.<br />
135<br />
Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, p. 252.<br />
136<br />
Shiller, Robert J., “Irrational Exuberance in the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of<br />
Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies,<br />
2002), pp. 83-86.<br />
137<br />
Elliott, Deni, “Terrorism, Global Journalism <strong>and</strong> the Myth of the Nation State” in Journal of Mass Media<br />
Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume 19, number 1, pp. 42-43.<br />
138<br />
Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, p. 56.<br />
49
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
from the so-called ‘information age’ emerged. They were worried about how mass media<br />
were lopsided in coverage favouring the rich countries, <strong>and</strong> in accessibility to technical<br />
equipment. UNESCO became the major forum for this debate. UNESCO appointed, in<br />
1976, a commission chaired by Seán MacBride to study ‘the totality of communication<br />
problems in modern societies’. The 1980 UNESCO summit agreed upon proposals from<br />
the commission where some of the poor countries’ concerns were adapted. The result was<br />
a great debate where leading media, especially those in the United States <strong>and</strong> the British,<br />
blamed UNESCO for trying to implement a media policy, where governments should<br />
correct these biases in media. That would be an intervention into the press freedom <strong>and</strong><br />
impossible regarding democratic considerations. In 1983/84 the United States withdrew<br />
from UNESCO, partly due to this conflict. 139<br />
The major proposals of the NWICO debates are not implemented. The process also<br />
illustrate how global media is a stronger political player than poor countries. 140 The ruling<br />
elites both in North <strong>and</strong> South have common interests in media maintaining their<br />
hegemony which makes the dividing line not geography but economic classes in a global<br />
informal network. 141 These are supposed to act as capitalists whether they are from North,<br />
South, are domestic or foreigners. 142<br />
The United States contributed to reduce UNESCO’s role through increasing the<br />
m<strong>and</strong>ate of another UN agency, the <strong>International</strong> Telecommunication Union (ITU), for<br />
shaping the ‘global mass media policy’. 143 With technological development, in particular<br />
how internet put traditional media <strong>and</strong> communication technology together, ITU emerged<br />
as an important actor in media policy. The way the internet is used by terrorists, extremists,<br />
139 Gerbner, George, Mowlana, Hamid <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, The Global Media Debate : Its Rise, Fall,<br />
<strong>and</strong> Renewal (New Jersey: Ablex Publishing, 1993), pp. 1-33.<br />
140 Ibid., pp. 25-26.<br />
141<br />
An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, p. 25.<br />
142<br />
Ochieng, Philip, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics in Africa (Nairobi:<br />
Initiatives Publishers, 1992), p. 115.<br />
143<br />
Savio, Roberto, “New Information Order Leading Towards ‘Unthink’ ” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), 19 th April, 2004.<br />
50
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
organised crime, <strong>and</strong> pornography have been reasons for implementing stronger<br />
international control mechanisms towards that new medium. 144 However, these attempts to<br />
restrict press freedom have not sparked off great debates.<br />
Second is how the development agenda connects media with globalisation. These<br />
debates concern mass media’s support to development in accordance with Western donors’<br />
interests, <strong>and</strong> alliances between media <strong>and</strong> other development actors. Recent changes in<br />
development theories has also changed thinking about relations between media <strong>and</strong><br />
development. Authorities used to decide issues <strong>and</strong> development journalism was supposed<br />
to support the authorities’ efforts. The change is that emphasis is on solutions <strong>and</strong> priorities<br />
emanating from people, <strong>and</strong> media were key to this change of attitude regarding<br />
development. 145<br />
On behalf of Western donors, the World Bank ties political conditions to aid. 146 The<br />
purpose is to develop democracies. However, the World Bank’s definiton of ‘democracy’,<br />
including ‘free market’, ‘privatisation’, <strong>and</strong> ‘civil society’ is a model that benefits global<br />
economic interests dominated by Western companies. ‘Free media’ is expected to<br />
contribute to better democracy. The bank says that a new mind-set will emerge where<br />
governments will underst<strong>and</strong> that it is an agent for its own citizens. India is pointed out as<br />
evidence from the World Bank, because that country has not had any famine since<br />
independence even if there has been poverty <strong>and</strong> drought. The explanation is given to be<br />
the media’s freedom <strong>and</strong> role in good governance in India. 147 Ug<strong>and</strong>a is mentioned as a<br />
successful example of the World Bank’s policy of development. As a force to build the<br />
144<br />
Loader, Brian D., The Governance of Cyberspace : Politics, Technology <strong>and</strong> Global Restructuring<br />
(London: Routledge, 1997), pp. 209-212.<br />
145<br />
Hydén, Göran <strong>and</strong> Leslie, Michael, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa” in Hydén, Göran,<br />
Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction<br />
Publishers, 2002), pp. 4-5.<br />
146<br />
Browne, Stephen, Beyond Aid : From Patronage to Partnership (Aldershot: Ashgate, 1999), pp. 5, 19-27<br />
<strong>and</strong> 169.<br />
147<br />
Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 39 (mind-set); <strong>and</strong> Besley, Burgess <strong>and</strong> Prat, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong><br />
Political Accountability”, p. 53 (India); <strong>and</strong> Godbole, Madhav, “Good Governance: A Distant Dream” in<br />
Economic <strong>and</strong> Political Weekly (Mumbai: Sameeksha Trust, 2004), 13 th March, 2004, pp. 1106.<br />
51
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
country, the bank emphasised the media’s role as a part of the Ug<strong>and</strong>an civil society. 148<br />
However, the actual politics on openness into public information, is not an easy process to<br />
establish in the country. 149<br />
An alliance evolved among media, development politicians, NGOs engaged with<br />
development aid, <strong>and</strong> scientists within the field, all who benefit from interactions in<br />
development. Critics claim that the mass media are too much intertwined with the<br />
development sphere to have a critical approach where some distance is necessary. The<br />
development agenda (or ‘development regime’) benefits from the extensive attention from<br />
the mass media to achieve public support. 150 In this way the mass media enter development<br />
politics as an actor, <strong>and</strong> the World Bank emphasises how it is a goal for the development<br />
politics to strengthen this alliance. The goal is to re-establish the role of mass media to<br />
become a partner in the development politics, connected to the agenda of globalisation. 151<br />
Introduction of mass media into development aid policy is controversial. Despite<br />
media’s supports to global democratisation processes there are considered to be a part of<br />
the process where states are weakened <strong>and</strong> the underlying interests are to promote<br />
American values <strong>and</strong> economics. 152 Democratisation is in accordance with the mass<br />
media’s declared social responsibility. Thus, in that concept interests behind the liberal<br />
economic globalisation have found a key to create an alliance with the most honourable<br />
interests within mass media. Whether liberalism is the system which benefit mass media’s<br />
social responsibilty is another debate.<br />
Third are three types of criticism about press freedom that arose from Africa. One<br />
is warning against copying of Western concepts. Second is the attempt to define African<br />
148<br />
Datta-Mitra (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Policy, Participation, People, pp. 133 <strong>and</strong> 138-141.<br />
149<br />
Musoke, David, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Publishers Right to Information Bill” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />
150<br />
Tvedt, Terje, Utviklingshjelp, utenrikspolitikk og makt : Makt- og demokratiutredningen (Oslo:<br />
Gyldendal, 2003), pp. 232-236.<br />
151<br />
Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 1-23.<br />
152<br />
Munene, Macharia, “Hazards of Postmodern Colonialism in Kenya”, Draft Paper prepared for Conference on<br />
‘The Political Economy of Kenya’, Oxford University, 27 th – 28 th May, 2004, Oxford, United Kingdom, p. 14.<br />
52
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
versions of press freedom. Finally are claims that concepts of press freedom are among<br />
tools of neo-colonialism.<br />
In claiming that press freedom is a Western concept, critics point out that in the<br />
North, liberal authorities tend to protect citizens at the expense of the community, while in<br />
the South, people tend to be victims of activities that the authorities in the North protect.<br />
Hence, this Northern liberalism, including mass media, is not an appropriate model for the<br />
South. 153 UNESCO, in a worldwide comparative study of media councils <strong>and</strong> codes of<br />
conduct, concluded that Western ideas are not necessarily the basis for press freedom:<br />
“Because the pattern <strong>and</strong> philosophy of mass communication in Third<br />
World countries are not the same as that in many of the developed countries,<br />
the media councils in those countries cannot <strong>and</strong> should not be just carbon<br />
copies of those in the developed world.” 154<br />
This perception was reinforced in a 2002 study by Jennifer Ostini <strong>and</strong> Anthony Y.<br />
H. Fung that concluded that Western concepts <strong>and</strong> values such as a free press were not<br />
transferable. Ostini <strong>and</strong> Fung stated that these values do not work the same way in other<br />
cultures. 155 Western press systems implemented in Africa are even accused of damaging<br />
traditional community societies. Because mass media <strong>and</strong> information systems were used<br />
for control, power imbalances emerged. 156<br />
The Canadian philosopher Marshall McLuhan argued that communication<br />
technology tied the world together in globalisation <strong>and</strong> that technology was not neutral to<br />
values. Changes in communication changed values <strong>and</strong> that there were underlying forces<br />
of media dominance than the content in the media. 157 It was the underlying forces that<br />
African leaders, in newly independent states, felt used the media to control them. That<br />
153 Ochilo, Polycarp Omolo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence” in UNESCO, Public Service<br />
Broadcasting <strong>and</strong> Editorial Independence: Strengthening Democratic Voices (Helsinki, Finl<strong>and</strong>: The<br />
Finnish National Commission for UNESCO, 1998), p. 47.<br />
154 Jones, J. Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils : A comparative international study on<br />
professional st<strong>and</strong>ards (Paris: UNESCO <strong>Press</strong>, 1980), p. 56.<br />
155 Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism” in Journal of Mass Media Ethics<br />
(New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19, number 2-2004, p. 132.<br />
156 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 41-45 <strong>and</strong> 60-64; <strong>and</strong> Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 213.<br />
157 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 339-343.<br />
53
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
included use of mass media as agents of cultural imperialism. McLuhan’s theories gave<br />
these leaders a framework to justify control of media to counter what they interpreted as<br />
Western propag<strong>and</strong>a. 158<br />
‘Media is the message’, McLuhan formulated. Some studies have pointed out how<br />
the African oral traditions made up societies different from those in the West based on<br />
written traditions. 159 Many differences between Western <strong>and</strong> traditional African societies<br />
can be traced back to these respectively written <strong>and</strong> oral traditions. 160 When African elites<br />
got education they adopted Western written traditions including use of written media. That<br />
is one of the reasons for growing elite alienation in Africa. 161 Radio <strong>and</strong> TV are more<br />
connected to the oral tradition. 162<br />
Some have attempted to identify a specific African press freedom. In 1962 Tom<br />
Mboya asked: “What is freedom of the press?” His answer was that African press can not<br />
behave like those in London, Paris or New York. After Kenya’s independence in 1963, he<br />
became a member of the cabinet. Mboya emphasised that the local press had a duty to<br />
Africa, <strong>and</strong> that they had to make their own contributions towards Africa. 163 His conclu-<br />
sion on press freedom sounded close to development journalism.<br />
One proposal of African press freedom is called the ‘unfinished agenda’. Emphasis<br />
is on democratisation processes where African actors pursue increased press freedom with<br />
support from the people. The ‘unfinished agenda’ calls for the repeal of anachronistic laws,<br />
many from the colonial days, <strong>and</strong> for free access to information in public administration.<br />
There is call for the creation of independent media councils that would h<strong>and</strong>le disputes<br />
affecting the media, <strong>and</strong> for independent media commissions to ensure balanced coverage<br />
158<br />
Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, pp. 20-22.<br />
159<br />
Ibid., p. 20.<br />
160<br />
Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, pp. 7-13.<br />
161<br />
Ibid., pp. 21-32.<br />
162<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 44.<br />
163<br />
Mboya, Tom, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa” in The Challenge of Nationhood : A<br />
collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings (Nairobi: East African Educational Publishers Ltd., 1993 [1970]), p. 137.<br />
54
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
in public owned media. Finally, the most powerful step is pointed out to be politicians<br />
behaviour in practice of press freedom. 164<br />
Another proposal has an underlying premise that African democracies have not yet<br />
been well established. The ideal is yet similar to Western as described in the Universal<br />
Declaration of Human Rights. According to this ideal, the proposal recommends constitut-<br />
ions which guarantee press freedom as well as free access to information. Further, areas of<br />
official secrets have to be reduced <strong>and</strong> journalists should be allowed to keep confidential<br />
sources. To abolish regulations on contempt of parliament, government or the president<br />
<strong>and</strong> leave criminal defamations to civil cases, are pointed out as crucial. 165<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom is also accused of being a neo-colonialist instrument to suppress<br />
Africa. <strong>Press</strong> freedom ensures spread of like-minded media <strong>and</strong> a global culture. Hence,<br />
the media are among the means for the hegemon to control consciousness. This is<br />
supported by how the West controls almost all news to <strong>and</strong> from the South. 166 Even news<br />
events within Africa are, in African media, covered by Western news agencies due to lack<br />
of resources to cover “their own” events. 167 The point is that if the oppressed ones can<br />
view themselves as they are viewed by the ruling elites, then they can become their own<br />
policemen. That means that there is no need for a colonial master because Africans are<br />
ruled by the global culture <strong>and</strong> news flows. 168 In this argument global press freedom is<br />
regarded as a necessity to create a web of control.<br />
From the very beginning of Western civilisation, the Greeks portrayed Africa as an<br />
otherness – as ‘barbarians’ <strong>and</strong> ‘savages’. Western science continued to acquire knowledge<br />
about Africa within European philosophical frameworks. Present knowledge about Africa<br />
164<br />
Ogbondah, “Media Laws in Political Transition”, pp. 73-77.<br />
165<br />
Mbome, Peter H., “Aspects of Human Rights in an African Context” in Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare,<br />
Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 42-44.<br />
166<br />
Thiong’o, Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre : The Struggle for Cultural <strong>Freedom</strong>s (Nairobi: East African<br />
Educational Publishers, 1993), pp. 47-52.<br />
167<br />
Lehihi, Masego, “Broadcast Headaches” in Business in Africa (Rivonia, South Africa: Business in Africa<br />
Group, 2004), June 2004, pp. 24-25.<br />
168<br />
Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre, pp. 47-52.<br />
55
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
is therefore mostly European interpretations. 169 This Western creation of Africa dominates<br />
stories about Africa in global media. Images from the colonial era are still alive. These are<br />
stereotypes such as adventures, crocodiles, Tarzan, disasters <strong>and</strong> military coups. Thus,<br />
Africa is transformed to adventures which can be commodities in the global market for<br />
media content. 170 <strong>Press</strong> freedom with social responsibility has not been any hindrance to<br />
exploit <strong>and</strong> stigmatise Africa like this in global markets.<br />
Even Africans themselves are inhibited by this Western philosophy. Attempts to<br />
make an African notion of press freedom, take a critical view to Western values but come<br />
up with similarities to Western practice. In the neo-colonialism debate, it is pointed out<br />
how Africans use Western philosophy to describe Africa <strong>and</strong> how that continue to support<br />
the Western notion of Africa. Within the framework of Western philosophy, it is<br />
impossible to produce unique African concepts. To be liberated from Western political <strong>and</strong><br />
economic dominance, it is necessary to develop specific African thought systems. 171 Thus,<br />
it is a long way to any specific press freedom based on African values.<br />
Another neo-colonial force is ownership. A lot of African media industry is owned<br />
by Western corporates. In addition, almost all content beyond local events are produced by<br />
news agencies, other media providers as well as advertising agencies owned by Western<br />
companies. 172 It is in their interests to maintain the existing media order based on Western<br />
concepts of free markets <strong>and</strong> press freedom.<br />
The West preaches democracy <strong>and</strong> press freedom to Africa, but the democratisation<br />
processes are different. In the West, democracies emerged as a compromise to manage<br />
169<br />
Mudimbe, V. Y., The Idea of Africa (Bloomington: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1994), pp. 40-41, 71-72 <strong>and</strong><br />
211-212.<br />
170<br />
Hawk, Beverly G. (ed.), Africa’s Media Image (Westport, USA: Praeger Publishers, 1992), pp. 4-16.<br />
171<br />
p’Bitek, Okot, African Religions in Western Scholarship (Nairobi: Kenya Literature Bureau, 1970), pp.<br />
90-91 <strong>and</strong> 102-119.<br />
172<br />
Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism”, p. 131; <strong>and</strong> Paterson, “Global<br />
Battlefields”, p. 80.<br />
56
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
conflicts between opposite camps. In Africa, the crucial point is to be liberated from an<br />
authoritarian system imposed by European colonial masters. 173<br />
173 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 60-63.<br />
57
Chapter 3: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian mass media are among the freest in the world. The notion of press freedom<br />
in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia evolved from common democratic philosophies. This chapter has two parts.<br />
First, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian context is described. History of press freedom as well as reasons<br />
for it are examined, <strong>and</strong> the position of mass media in the societies is presented. Second,<br />
four aspects of press freedom are examined including use of case studies. These are how<br />
media’s role is settled, freedom to gather information, freedom to publish, <strong>and</strong> protection<br />
of journalistic activities.<br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian Context<br />
The democratic, legal <strong>and</strong> cultural traditions in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries of Norway,<br />
Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark are similar. They have similar notions about press freedoms, have<br />
similar history on press freedom <strong>and</strong> it is similar information about mass media in these<br />
societies. 1 Norway is representative of these Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries.<br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
The first newspapers appeared in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in the 17 th <strong>and</strong> 18 th centuries. The need for<br />
trade communication triggered the emergence of the press whose content was mostly<br />
advertisements <strong>and</strong> business information. Stories about issues in the society were still not<br />
properly developed. A basic principle at that time was that printing <strong>and</strong> publishing were<br />
subject to royal authorisation. The common condition was that the kings’ men ruled over<br />
the content. Otherwise, the printers – the editors of those days – censored themselves<br />
according to the kings’ requests. Laws on sencorship included even the death penalty. 2<br />
1 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud (Oslo: Statens<br />
Forvaltningstjeneste, 1996), section 3.1. Chapter 3 <strong>and</strong> 4 in this study include a comparative study on media<br />
ethics in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries.<br />
2 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 16-23, 27 <strong>and</strong> 45-50.<br />
58
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The spirit <strong>and</strong> ideals of the Enlightenment, the French Revolution as well as con-<br />
temporary English philosophy, influenced the development of democratic trends in Sc<strong>and</strong>i-<br />
navia. 3 Sweden got a kind of print freedom as early as 1766 4 which is considered as the<br />
world’s oldest constitutional provision for freedom of expression. 5 By 1814, a new Nor-<br />
wegian constitution guaranteed freedom of printing <strong>and</strong> publishing as well as freedom to<br />
do business. From the 1830s, a trend appeared where discourses on matters in society<br />
were moved from the king’s closed rooms to the public sphere. A strong growth of<br />
associations as well as an increasing number of newspapers <strong>and</strong> political pamphlets,<br />
contributed to an institutionalising of public discourse. 6<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom became a hot issue as some newspapers in Norway by 1837<br />
committed themselves to protecting their sources of information. Since authorities wanted<br />
to maintain their monopoly of information, the Norwegian government imposed a rule of<br />
confidentiality on its officials in 1845. That step surprised Denmark <strong>and</strong> Sweden because it<br />
was considered as a serious setback for democratisation. There followed debates on ethical<br />
matters with such questions as ‘what is the difference between law <strong>and</strong> morality?’, <strong>and</strong><br />
‘what is privacy?’, or ‘what is of public interests?’ being raised 7 The debate started a<br />
continuing process that shapes the press’ code of conduct.<br />
The next phase was the establishment of press associations which institutionalised<br />
instruments that promoted the interests of the press. The numerous organisations indicates<br />
that ‘interests of the press’ were not one coherent subject. These organisations had<br />
different aims, such as editorial interests (in contradiction to business), education <strong>and</strong> terms<br />
of employment as well as political <strong>and</strong> regional purposes. The variety of media<br />
3 Ibid., pp. 26, 38-39 <strong>and</strong> 66.<br />
4 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov (Oslo:<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003), section 4.2.2.<br />
5 Ogundimu, Folu Folarin, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie,<br />
Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers,<br />
2002), p. 218.<br />
6 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 18 <strong>and</strong> 31-37.<br />
7 Ibid., pp. 45-50.<br />
59
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
organisations are today streamlined in a cooperating system. They include unions of<br />
journalists, association of editors, owner’s associations, <strong>and</strong> other interest organisations.<br />
They all emphasise different aspects of press freedom. 8<br />
Education has been considered crucial for press freedom. An educated journalist or<br />
editor is supposed to behave more professionally <strong>and</strong> resist external influence better than<br />
an uneducated one. In Norway, the first dem<strong>and</strong> for editorial education was proposed in<br />
1875, <strong>and</strong> the first school of journalism was established in 1919. However, the first public<br />
school of journalism was not a reality until 1965. 9<br />
The European Convention on Human Rights, in paricular article 10, is important for<br />
the legal framework for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. This Convention has harmonised<br />
the legal practice in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia with Europe. 10<br />
Beyond progress in legal environment, two other movements promoted press<br />
freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. First was the independence <strong>and</strong> movement for editorial<br />
independence to resist pressure from the influence of external interests, the King or<br />
government officials. From around 1900 independence from government became the ideal<br />
to be pursued by editors. Several attempts to ensure the principle came to an end in 1953<br />
when a formal declaration of the editor’s independence was made between The Associ-<br />
ation of Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> The Norwegian Newspaper’s Owners Association. In<br />
Denmark a similar declaration was adopted at about the same time. Sweden passed laws to<br />
ensure freedom of expression. 11<br />
After 1970 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian newspapers liberated themselves from political parties, 12<br />
but not from the owners whose influence continued to determine media content. One way<br />
out was to have many owners so that if one newspaper is biased in favour of one camp,<br />
8<br />
Ibid., pp. 60, 74-77, 84-88 <strong>and</strong> 115-118.<br />
9<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 91-93.<br />
10<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 136-140 <strong>and</strong> 1002-1008.<br />
11<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 83 <strong>and</strong> 96.<br />
12 Ibid., p. 118.<br />
60
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
another view would emerge in another newspaper. That fits in with the Associate Justice of<br />
the United States’ Supreme Court, Oliver Wendell Holmes Jr.’s, concept of ‘marketplace<br />
of ideas’ where competing ideas would result in a public discourse where the best idea<br />
would receive support. 13 Such an approach has strong support in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> is an<br />
important reason for politics which stimulate a wide range of different media. 14<br />
Second are formalised codes of conduct that support a self-regulating regime where<br />
“media rule media”. These are based on the assumption that if the media behave<br />
responsibly, <strong>and</strong> in accordance with the ideals of social responsibility, government would<br />
not need to interfere with media operations. Sweden, in 1874, was the first country in the<br />
world to forge a system of formalised codes of conduct within the press, 15 <strong>and</strong> founded a<br />
media council in 1916. 16 Norway followed by 1929. 17 In Denmark, this Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian style<br />
of self-regulation is organised within a legal framework for a responsible press including<br />
provisions for judicial action. However, Sweden <strong>and</strong> Norway do not have such laws. 18<br />
Media’s role in societies, <strong>and</strong> hence the purpose of press freedom, has got its<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian notion. A feature of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian democracies has been extensive welfare<br />
systems. In Sweden this philosophy is termed ‘the people’s home’. Such a system has been<br />
based on high level of union memberships <strong>and</strong> myriads of other organisations taking care<br />
of people’s interests in a highly organised civil society. A culture of collective interests has<br />
been dominant. In this way citizens have had a power base towards economic elites.<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media reflect these power structures. Patterns in civil society <strong>and</strong> collective<br />
interests have given the pattern in media which then have given the prevailing opinion of<br />
13<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 58-60.<br />
14<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 116-118.<br />
15<br />
Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-69.<br />
16<br />
Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 231.<br />
17<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 78.<br />
18<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, sections 3.1<br />
<strong>and</strong> 3.3.1.<br />
61
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
media’s role in societies as supporter of ‘the people’s home’ notion of democracy. 19<br />
Present forces in economic globalisation are a serious challenge to this kind of media<br />
supported welfare system. 20<br />
Commercialisation of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media has followed patterns common to other<br />
Western countries. Popularisation of contents <strong>and</strong> restructuring of ownerships are among<br />
the results. An effect of popularisation is how content has to follow commercial logic <strong>and</strong><br />
achieve market objectives rather than political objectives. An effect of altered ownerships<br />
is liberation from political owners only to develop new ties to owners with commercial<br />
purposes. Despite media’s strong bonds to traditional Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian democratic values, a<br />
shift of power has taken place in newsrooms. Owners <strong>and</strong> managers adapt tough economic<br />
criteria that reduce the power of journalists to represent citizens. 21 In this way commercial<br />
interests have grown in importance as framework for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />
Reasons for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
There are three given reasons for the growth of press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. First is the<br />
search for truth. Second is democracy. Third is love of individual liberty.<br />
Firstly, truth is a good in itself, or truth is a means to achieve other goods. The<br />
search for the truth, including discourse among competing truths, is emphasised as a pur-<br />
pose for freedom of expression in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The belief that the truth will win is<br />
widespread in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries. Therefore, even wrong expressions <strong>and</strong> opinions<br />
are protected in public discourses. 22<br />
Secondly, democratic reasons for press freedom have been argued in two ways in<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. On one h<strong>and</strong>, people need free information to be empowered to play their<br />
19 Dahlgren, Peter, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden” in Curran, James <strong>and</strong> Park,<br />
Myung-Jin, De-Westernizing Media Studies (London: Routledge, 2000), pp. 252-253.<br />
20 Ibid., pp. 262-263.<br />
21 Ibid., pp. 251 <strong>and</strong> 257-258.<br />
22 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 37-55.<br />
62
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
individual role in a democracy. If people decide leadership by ballots, they need free<br />
information to select <strong>and</strong> vote for c<strong>and</strong>idates. Such a system trusts in the enlightened <strong>and</strong><br />
rational man. On the other h<strong>and</strong>, a free press will be the channel of information to the<br />
leaders. Media’s critical attention to a wide range of issues ensure that the leaders are well<br />
informed about society’s needs. Since freedom of expression is meant to move conflicts<br />
from use of force <strong>and</strong> violence to debates, the youth in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are raised <strong>and</strong><br />
socialised to be democratic <strong>and</strong> to consider the interests of the minority. A free <strong>and</strong> open<br />
press may be means to ensure the interests of the minorities, to ensure plurality. In these<br />
circumstances a free press is supposed to legitimatise democratic decision-making<br />
processes. 23<br />
Thirdly, individual liberty is a basic value in a liberal society. Such an equal right to<br />
freedom of expression was the major concern when constitutions were written, influenced<br />
by French <strong>and</strong> English philosophy. Later, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian societies changed. Practice in<br />
the countries’ Supreme Courts as well as in the European Commission <strong>and</strong> Court of<br />
Human Rigths indicates that democratic arguments are superior to individual liberal rights.<br />
Therefore, political expressions are supposed to be protected more than, for instance,<br />
information about privacy. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia there is debate about balancing public interests<br />
with privacy. 24<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom is protected from at least three forces. These are interference from<br />
government, external private forces, <strong>and</strong> the owner’s commercial interests. In searching for<br />
freedom from such forces, a paradox has arisen. Editors sought alliance with legislators to<br />
increase the legal protection of editorial independence from their own owners. Another<br />
effort to reduce owners’ influence is to ensure spreading of media ownerships. 25<br />
23 Ibid., pp. 55-80.<br />
24 Ibid., pp. 80-87.<br />
25 Ibid., pp. 604-611; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 115-118.<br />
63
Mass Media in the Societies<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are worldwide ranked at the top in many ways. Indicators<br />
which put these countries at the global top level include use of media, circulation, spread<br />
of media equipment <strong>and</strong> technological infrastructure. 26 Broadcasting in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />
includes private commercial channels as well as public radio <strong>and</strong> TV stations both at local<br />
<strong>and</strong> national levels. The public broadcasters have long-established traditions <strong>and</strong> maintain<br />
a strong position in all these countries. The spread or use of radio <strong>and</strong> TV may be<br />
illustrated by the following table:<br />
Number of radio <strong>and</strong> TV receivers per 1000 inhabitants (1996) 27<br />
Country TV Radio<br />
Denmark 594 1145<br />
Norway 462 917<br />
Sweden 519 932<br />
There is extensive spread of print media in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Concerning newspapers,<br />
the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are ranked with the top in the world. It is common to read more<br />
than one newspaper a day.<br />
Spread of daily newspapers (1996) 28<br />
Country Number of Total Circulation per<br />
titles circulation 1000 inhabitants<br />
Denmark 37 1,628,000 311<br />
Norway 83 2,578,000 590<br />
Sweden 94 4,499,000 445<br />
distinguished.<br />
Another print media, books, is an area where the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are<br />
26<br />
UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000 (Paris: UNESCO, 1999), pp. 262-<br />
271.<br />
27<br />
United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997 (New York: United Nations, 2000), table<br />
18, pp. 130-137.<br />
28<br />
Ibid., table 16, pp. 117-123. More recent data are available, these are used to be comparable with East<br />
Africa below. However, these figures have been stable over time.<br />
64
Number of new published book titles (1996) 29<br />
Country New book titles Titles per<br />
1000 inhabitants<br />
Denmark 12,352 2.3<br />
Norway 6,900 1.6<br />
Sweden 13,496 1.6<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Internet <strong>and</strong> telecommunications have been widespread in all kinds of daily life in<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Figures indicate that only neighbouring Finl<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> the United States have a<br />
more extensive use of internet in the world than Norway, Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark. 30<br />
Journalistic capacity indicates the media’s potential power in society. The numbers<br />
of practicing journalists <strong>and</strong> editors in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are in Denmark 11,000, 31 in Norway<br />
8,000, 32 <strong>and</strong> in Sweden 15,000. 33 Hence, in statistical terms, each journalist has in average<br />
to watch about 550 citizens. 34<br />
Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />
The growth of press freedom can be examined in four ways. First is the role of the press<br />
itself. Second is the process of news gathering. Third is publishing. And fourth is the<br />
protection of journalistic activities.<br />
29<br />
Ibid., table 15, pp. 111-116.<br />
30<br />
UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 271.<br />
31<br />
The Danish Union of Journalists, “Om DJ” (København: The Danish Union of Journalists, 2005), at:<br />
http://www.journalistforbundet.dk/sw101.asp, downloaded 11 th March, 2005. The figures here are<br />
calculated similar to the figures for Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden. Denmark’s definition of ‘journalist’ is wider than<br />
in Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden.<br />
32<br />
Estimate made by Jahn-Arne Olsen, Secretary-General of The Norwegian Union of Journalists, in<br />
correspondance by e-mail received 3 rd March, 2005.<br />
33<br />
Estimate made by Hans Kilsved, Secretary-General of The Swedish Union of Journalists, in<br />
correspondance by e-mail received 3 rd March, 2005.<br />
34<br />
Number of inhabitants from: Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000 (Redmond, Washington:<br />
Microsoft, 1999), CD-rom.<br />
65
Role of the <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have long-established democracies that support the develop-<br />
ment of media’s free <strong>and</strong> extensive role in society. Both the governments <strong>and</strong> the media<br />
have contributed to the development.<br />
At a constitutional level the principle is that anyone is free to publish without any<br />
permission in advance. That was formulated in Article 100 in the Norwegian Constitution<br />
of 1814. 35 Sweden has similar constitution but a more extensive legal system around these<br />
instruments. 36 Another constitutional regulation which supports free media within the<br />
private sector is the freedom for anyone to run a business. 37<br />
There are many regulations of publishing activities. These include the system of<br />
licence for radio or TV broadcasting because of limited access to frequences. Due to this<br />
scantiness of frequence numbers, politics <strong>and</strong> commercial interests entered in the<br />
distribution of licences. The politics have been to ensure that the airwaves bring cultural<br />
diversity, local content, <strong>and</strong> many voices in the democratic processes. The economic value<br />
of a frequency has sometimes been an object of charges or taxes as well. In this way, the<br />
licence system for broadcast media has been an instrument where the authorities decide a<br />
framework for content <strong>and</strong> economic conditions. Due to the democratic reasons behind<br />
these politics, such regulations are considered to be in accordance with the freedom of<br />
expression. 38 All the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have strong public broadcasters which have<br />
dominant positions in TV as well as radio. These operate within a framework decided by<br />
cultural politics. The public broadcasters are mainly funded by public resources.<br />
35<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 35 <strong>and</strong> 95-96.<br />
36<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 96.<br />
37<br />
Ibid., p. 35.<br />
38<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 47 <strong>and</strong> 611-632.<br />
66
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have been among the latest in the West to liberalise broadcasting<br />
<strong>and</strong> allow private actors in radio <strong>and</strong> TV. 39<br />
Taxes <strong>and</strong> subsidies have been instruments to support media activities in Sc<strong>and</strong>i-<br />
navia. In Norway, about US$ 40 million are granted annually as subsidies to economically<br />
weak newspapers. 40 Further, newspapers are exempted from value added tax. The same is<br />
the case in Sweden where newspapers have value added tax at a reduced level. The media<br />
as an industry benefit from several economic arrangements which support media to grow<br />
stronger. The reason behind such politics is to ensure plurality <strong>and</strong> independence for the<br />
media as vehicles for democratic processes. 41 Similar reasons are given for regulations of<br />
media which are intended to maintain plaurality <strong>and</strong> prevent concentration of ownership. 42<br />
The press itself is a major actor in the society. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media, by<br />
performance, gain public support which in turn increases press freedom. At the moment<br />
there are two main means for strengthening the independence. First, is continuous pursuit<br />
of binding declarations <strong>and</strong> legal instruments that protect the independence. The<br />
Norwegian declaration “Rights <strong>and</strong> Duties of the Editor” from 1953 about the editor’s<br />
independence, has achieved a legal precedent. 43 Sweden has similar regulations by law. 44<br />
Second, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media live up to the self-regulation doctrine of ‘let the<br />
press correct the press’. 45 Therefore, media prefer to solve conflicts through media councils<br />
rather than in court. The courts are considered as government instruments, <strong>and</strong> media<br />
prefer that such an act from authorities should be reserved for cases they cannot solve by<br />
39<br />
Dahlgren, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden”, p. 258.<br />
40<br />
Journalisten, “<strong>Press</strong>estøtten kuttes fem prosent” in Journalisten (Oslo: Norsk Journalistlag), news article,<br />
11 th May, 2004. The article is also published at:<br />
http://www.journalisten.no/artikkel.asp?GUID={67CC731C-BD7D-442F-9573-<br />
4E4F1CFF8C58}&kategoriID=3&temaID=245, downloaded 8 th March, 2005.<br />
41<br />
Correspondance with Nils Øy, Secretary-General in the Norwegian Association of Editors, e-mail received<br />
9 th March, 2005.<br />
42<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 689-691.<br />
43<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 80 <strong>and</strong> 83.<br />
44 Ibid., p. 96.<br />
45 Ibid., pp. 38-39 <strong>and</strong> 116-118.<br />
67
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
themselves. 46 The “law” for these media councils are codes of conduct usually made by the<br />
media themselves. Among many detailed descriptions, the superior value of independence<br />
is emphasised in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. For instance, as quoted from article 1.1 in the Code of Ethics<br />
of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong>: “A free, independent press is among the most important<br />
institutions in a democratic society.” 47 Of course, competing interests emerge between the<br />
press, authorities as well as other actors. These are typically actors mentioned in a bad light<br />
by the media. Such conflicts are usually left to the press’ own organs or as civil lawsuits. 48<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have called attention to the institution of ombudsman in<br />
media. The idea is to have the ombudsman as an independent mediator to channel conflicts<br />
between the public or single persons on one side <strong>and</strong> media actors on the other. It is<br />
supposed to be an institution which strengthens media ethics in an era where other forces<br />
place media’s conduct under pressure. 49<br />
The first media ombudsman emerged in Sweden in 1969 as a result of sharp debates<br />
on media ethics. Swedish media’s response was to create an ombudsman to ensure<br />
confidence in the established self-regulation system. His task was to assist complainants in<br />
their cases against media, mediate, or take cases to the media council. However, the<br />
Swedish ombudsman is appointed in a way that the Swedish government’s justice<br />
ombudsman is involved. So, the government has a stake into the press’ self-regulation<br />
system in Sweden. 50<br />
Good experiences from Sweden’s media ombudsman resulted in a call for a similar<br />
one in Norway. The Norwegian government initiated a study in 1996 that came up with a<br />
proposal. An ombudsman was supposed to work within the media’s self-regulation system,<br />
46 Ibid., pp. 76-79, 96-97 <strong>and</strong> 112.<br />
47 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom : Etiske normer for pressen (Oslo: The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong><br />
Association, 1999). This is published in English version at the web-site: Databank for European Codes of<br />
Journalism Ethics: http://www.uta.fi/ethicnet/ under the link “Norway”, downloaded 22 nd July, 2004.<br />
48 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 28 th January, 2005.<br />
49 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, chapter 2.<br />
50 Ibid., section 3.2.<br />
68
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
<strong>and</strong> yet within a new legal framework <strong>and</strong> with some strings to authorities. 51 Even though<br />
the idea itself was welcomed, voices both inside <strong>and</strong> outside the press rose against such a<br />
government interference. The Norwegian government then decided not to initiate a media<br />
ombudsman <strong>and</strong> emphasised media self-regulation. 52 However, even if such a media<br />
ombudsman was considered not to be in accordance with press freedom, this government<br />
initiated process resulted in other reforms where the media itself improved the self-<br />
regulation system. 53<br />
Gathering Information<br />
The right to have information belongs to people, not to media. Due to the press’ social<br />
responsibility it is supposed to serve public with information. This democratic right is the<br />
reason why the right to information is included in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian constitutions. 54 Access to<br />
information concerns both ethics <strong>and</strong> law as well as practical circumstances.<br />
The Code of Ethics of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> guides the process acquiring<br />
information. In Norway, it is emphasised as a principle that the press have to protect the<br />
access to official documents. Sources should be identifiable as long as identification does<br />
not come into conflict with the need to protect the sources. Journalists have to be critical in<br />
the choice of sources. Use of anonymous sources implies a special need for critical<br />
evaluation. The press should protect its sources. Such a protection is a basic principle in a<br />
free society <strong>and</strong> ensures the access to essential information. As a main rule, unpublished<br />
material should not be divulged to third parties. The press may show consideration for<br />
people who cannot be expected to be aware of the effect that their statements may have.<br />
51 Ibid., chapter 5.<br />
52 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Ot prp nr 77 (1996-97) : Om lov om endringer i kringkastingsloven<br />
(Medieetikk mv) (Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1997), sections 4.2-4.4.<br />
53 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 16 th February, 2005.<br />
54 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 55 <strong>and</strong> 78; <strong>and</strong> Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, p. 191.<br />
69
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Journalist may only use hidden cameras or microphones or false identity under special<br />
circumstances. 55<br />
The essence in this ethics is the principle of openness <strong>and</strong> open access to gather<br />
information, respect for the sources as well as protection of anonymous sources. Gradually,<br />
parts of this conduct of the press has been implemented into law. The principle of openness<br />
come up in philosophy of the Enlightenment, <strong>and</strong> was a matter in the struggle for press<br />
freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia already in the 18 th <strong>and</strong> 19 th century. In Norway, several processes,<br />
setbacks <strong>and</strong> progresses resulted in a law in 1970 where openness in civil service became<br />
the main rule. 56<br />
The need to protect the press’ confidential sources started as an ethical issue, <strong>and</strong><br />
then became the law in Norway, however, not as absolute as in the codes of conduct. 57 In<br />
Sweden legislators have gone farther <strong>and</strong> made the protection of sources complete.<br />
Regardless of the national laws, the European Court of Human Rights has in accordance<br />
with the European Convention on Human Rights article 10 established a strong legal<br />
protection of such sources. 58<br />
A question in the NWICO debate was ‘who is permitted to operate as journalist?’<br />
Many countries make formal requirements <strong>and</strong> government authorities issue press cards as<br />
license to be a journalist. 59 In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, authorities do not present requirements to<br />
media practitioners <strong>and</strong> the press’ own organs issue press cards. 60 It is not m<strong>and</strong>atory to<br />
have press card in order to operate as journalists. It is supposed that about 10% of<br />
journalists in Norway are not organised in the Union of Journalists <strong>and</strong> operate without<br />
55 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, cut from articles 1.3 <strong>and</strong> 3.1-3.10.<br />
56<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 115.<br />
57<br />
Ibid., pp. 98-99.<br />
58<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 78 <strong>and</strong> 341-344.<br />
59<br />
Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 192-193.<br />
60 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 92-94.<br />
70
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
press card. 61 The selection <strong>and</strong> control of staff <strong>and</strong> other inputs is solely left to the editors<br />
who operate within a framework of their own editorial policy <strong>and</strong> collective agreements.<br />
Education <strong>and</strong> professionalising of journalism is another way to improve quality of<br />
fact finding. Most Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian journalists have academic degrees. 62 Journalists in<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia have had to raise professional st<strong>and</strong>ards due to a highly educated public,<br />
competition, a complex society, <strong>and</strong> the growth in information flows from professional<br />
information officials feeding the journalists.<br />
In principle, the public administration’s documents in Norway, with some<br />
exceptions, are open to anyone. That has been law since 1970. In practice, the press <strong>and</strong><br />
officials of public authorities have many disputes about limitations <strong>and</strong> single cases. The<br />
purpose for openness is to create transparency. The law’s basic principle is that public<br />
administration’s documents are public as long as no exception in law has been made.<br />
Neither releasing of information is restricted to specific officials. 63 A government<br />
appointed committee which has carried out a study <strong>and</strong> new proposals, emphasises four<br />
reasons for the principle of openness: It is a way to ensure <strong>and</strong> maintain democracy,<br />
transparency to check public administration, public’s legal safeguards as well as admini-<br />
stration as a source of information. The first two, democracy <strong>and</strong> transparency, are pointed<br />
out as most important. 64 Documents exempted from publicity are mostly internal<br />
documents, information of a sensitive private nature, competition’s sensitive information<br />
(for instance during tender processes) as well as information concerning national interests<br />
or security. 65<br />
61 rd<br />
Correspondance with Olsen, e-mail received 3 March, 2005.<br />
62<br />
Ibid., pp. 92-94.<br />
63<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov, section<br />
3.2.3.<br />
64<br />
Ibid., sections 4.2.1-4.2.4.<br />
65 Ibid., section 3.2.5.<br />
71
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The problem is the law’s ambit which is supposed to be all public authorities at all<br />
levels where very few organs are exempted. Earlier, sectors of limited openness have been<br />
social authorities such as offices for child welfare, social security benefits, <strong>and</strong> health care<br />
as well as authorities of foreign affairs <strong>and</strong> the military. 66<br />
Public sectors in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are in a process of privatisation. Typically,<br />
public functions are reorganised into publicly owned limited companies or similarly run<br />
along the principles of private sector, sometimes even in competition with other private<br />
actors. Outsourcing of public services that can be provided by private actors is encouraged.<br />
The purposes are to increase the efficiency of public service <strong>and</strong> to reduce size of public<br />
sector. But the law’s principle of openness is not valid towards private sector. Therefore,<br />
privatisation results in reduced access to public information concerning crucial processes<br />
in a democratic society. 67<br />
The press complains over how privatisation has reduced openness in public<br />
authorities’ activities. In many single disputes, the decision is that publicly owned<br />
companies have to accept public involvement even if these are organised as limited<br />
companies, similar to private companies. 68 The actual proposal is to enlarge the scope of<br />
openness to include private actors which are performing authority on behalf of the public<br />
administration. The purpose is to maintain the principle of openness despite privatisation. 69<br />
Compared to Norway, the scope of openness is larger in Swedish administration, <strong>and</strong><br />
smaller in Denmark. 70<br />
66 Ibid., section 3.3.7.<br />
67 Ibid., sections 6.2-6.4.<br />
68 Ibid., section 6.2, in particular footnote 4.<br />
69 Ibid., sections 6.8 <strong>and</strong> 6.9.2.2.<br />
70 Ibid., sections 6.5.1 <strong>and</strong> 6.5.3.<br />
72
Publishing<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
This aspect about about freedom to select information <strong>and</strong> decide publishing has<br />
traditionally been at the core of press freedom. 71 This is the moment where information<br />
moves from few individuals to the public. So, information is transformed to be a force in<br />
society. In essence, it is media’s freedom to operate independently on publishing without<br />
external interference <strong>and</strong> only to be limited by democratic laws <strong>and</strong> ethics. 72<br />
Matters in conflict with freedom of expression can be categorised into national <strong>and</strong><br />
collective interests as well as private <strong>and</strong> individual interests. The clearest national interest<br />
is national security. Despite extensive press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, information that is<br />
injurious to national security is protected by law against publishing. In Norway, despite<br />
print freedom, police may confiscate all the copies immediately if they consider the content<br />
to be injurious to national security. Then, a court will have to confirm if the decision was<br />
right or not. 73<br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian notion of ‘democratic society’ includes some collective values.<br />
Due to tolerance towards minorities, some discriminatory expressions are prohibited.<br />
These are such as expressions toward particular groups as religious, ethnic, or sexual<br />
minorities as well as racial expressions. However, expressions have to be made public <strong>and</strong><br />
be quite harsh before these can be an offence. Further, the legal systems have restrictions<br />
against blasphemy, pornography <strong>and</strong> regulations of commercial messages. 74<br />
Private interests in conflict with publicity may be institutional as well as individual.<br />
A typical private institutional interest may be to protect a business from publicity that<br />
damages its reputation causing negative economic consequences. For individuals, bad<br />
71 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, p. 345.<br />
72 Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 193-195.<br />
73 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 595-600.<br />
74 Ibid., pp. 486-583.<br />
73
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
publicity may typically insult their privacy, reputation or injure their future possibilities. 75<br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian laws make a balance between the interests of transparency in the society<br />
<strong>and</strong> such private interests. 76 Typically, the press is allowed to give more details in matters<br />
of public interests compared with matters of private nature. 77 All these restrictions have<br />
resulted in the concept of ‘relative protection of freedom of expression’. The point is that<br />
the laws make a distinction between expressions which deserve to be protected according<br />
to democratic values, <strong>and</strong> those expressions which do not need such a protection. 78<br />
The codes of conduct are more detailed than laws. Typical Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian rules of<br />
publishing can be found in the Code of Ethics of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong>. The press is suppo-<br />
sed to be fair <strong>and</strong> thoughtful, <strong>and</strong> make plain what is factual information <strong>and</strong> what is com-<br />
ment. It has to respect a person’s character <strong>and</strong> identity, privacy, race, nationality or belief<br />
<strong>and</strong> not draw attention to personal or private aspects if they are irrelevant. Headlines, intro-<br />
ductions <strong>and</strong> leads have to be in accordance with the text. Presumption of guilt in crime<br />
<strong>and</strong> court reporting should be avoided. It has to be clear that the question of guilt has not<br />
been decided until the sentecne is legally pronounced. It is good press conduct to report the<br />
final result of court proceedings which have been reported earlier. The press should consid-<br />
er how reports on accidents <strong>and</strong> crime may affect the victims <strong>and</strong> next-of-kin. Victims or<br />
missing persons should not be identified before next-to-kin have been informed. In court<br />
<strong>and</strong> crime reporting names <strong>and</strong> pictures <strong>and</strong> other items of definite identification have to be<br />
used with caution, <strong>and</strong> only when this is necessary to meet just <strong>and</strong> fair dem<strong>and</strong>s for<br />
information. As a general rule, the identity of children should not be disclosed in sensitive<br />
cases. The press should in general never give any mention to suicide <strong>and</strong> attempted suicide.<br />
The credibility of the journalistic photograph as documentation has to be protected. If<br />
75<br />
Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 201-203.<br />
76<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 740-741.<br />
77<br />
Ibid., p. 771.<br />
78<br />
Ibid., p. 84.<br />
74
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
incorrect information is published, it must be corrected <strong>and</strong>, if necessary, an apology made<br />
as soon as possible. Those subjected to attacks should, as soon as possible, have the<br />
opportunity to reply. Those subjected to strong accusations shall, if possible, have the<br />
opportunity to simultaneous reply. Debates, criticism <strong>and</strong> dissemination of news must not<br />
be hampered by parties being unwilling to make comments. 79<br />
All Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have media councils to deal with such conflicts. The<br />
system insists that if a medium loses a case, it has to publish the media council’s<br />
statement. 80 In addition it is possible to prosecute media, <strong>and</strong> this leads to the problem of<br />
self-censorship as the editor seeks to avoid cases in court. 81 In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia plurality within<br />
media reduces such an effect. 82<br />
There is also concern over the balance between published details <strong>and</strong> the media’s<br />
social responsibility in crime reporting. The Norwegian code of conduct article 4.7 points<br />
out the rule that names <strong>and</strong> pictures <strong>and</strong> other details of identification in court <strong>and</strong> crime<br />
reporting have to be used with caution, <strong>and</strong> only when this is necessary to meet just <strong>and</strong><br />
fair dem<strong>and</strong>s for information. Judgements by the Media Council indicate where the bar is<br />
set in Norwegian practice. In one case the newspaper Nordlys reported a case of domestic<br />
violence including details of the incident <strong>and</strong> about the couple. Beyond the described<br />
course of events the complaints were concerned about publishing of personal information.<br />
Even if they were anonymous, almost everyone in their home district would identify them.<br />
In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the right of individuals to be protected from public reporting is highly<br />
regarded. Despite the attempt to conceal the identity of the couple, the Media Council’s<br />
79<br />
The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, cut from articles 4.1-4.15.<br />
80<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, section 3.1.<br />
81<br />
UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, pp. 74-75.<br />
82<br />
Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 604-611; <strong>and</strong> Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU<br />
1996:12 : Medieombud, section 2.1.2.<br />
75
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
conclusion was that the article “contains too many identifying details”. The right to be<br />
anonymous despite the press’ right to expose such a problem was emphasised. 83<br />
Another case was where the newspapers Agderposten <strong>and</strong> Verdens Gang published<br />
a picture of a gang of boys exercising v<strong>and</strong>alism. The boys were pictured from the back.<br />
However, when the parents recognised their own boys who were 12-13 years old, they<br />
went to the police <strong>and</strong> solved the matter. Despite the newspapers’ noble purposes, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
published picture’s contribution to solve the issue, the Media Council stated that the<br />
picture gave one of the boys an unnecessary additional burden due to his tender age. 84<br />
The point formulated by the Media Council is, however, that crime is a public mat-<br />
ter. Yet, as a main rule the culprit has a right of anonymity. The purpose is to subject crime<br />
to public debate without infringement of privacy. The identity tends to be published in the<br />
most serious cases, at a late phase in the process such as after judgement in a court, or if<br />
the person is already known to the public. The nuances between practices in the<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are that Sweden is most modest in publishing names, while<br />
Denmark exercises least protection of privacy. 85<br />
Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />
In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, there are some arrangements to protect the press to freely perform its<br />
activities. It concerns how authorities treat the press’ activities, protection from private<br />
actors threats, <strong>and</strong> the editorial department’s independence from owners’ interference.<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media’s approach emphasises the editor’s independence. This quote<br />
from the Norwegian declaration “Rights <strong>and</strong> Duties of the Editor” points out this position:<br />
83 <strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg (Norwegian Media Council), judgement in case 107/2004. Parts: NN <strong>and</strong> XX<br />
against Nordlys (newspaper). Concluding date: 24th August, 2004. Available at: http://81.0.149.237/pfu/<br />
84 <strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg (Norwegian Media Council), judgements in: Case 117/2003. Parts: NN against<br />
Agderposten (newspaper). And case 118/2004. Parts: NN against Verdens Gang (newspaper). Both cases<br />
at concluding date: 16 th December, 2003. Available at: http://81.0.149.237/pfu/<br />
85 Omdal, Sven Egil, “Menn som slår, kommer i avisen” in Stavanger Aftenblad (Stavanger, Norway:<br />
Stavanger Aftenblad ASA), 15 th January, 2005.<br />
76
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
“[…] An editor is expected to share the fundamental views <strong>and</strong> aims of<br />
his/her publication. But within this framework the editor is entitled to a free<br />
<strong>and</strong> independent leadership of the editorial department <strong>and</strong> editorial work<br />
<strong>and</strong> full freedom to shape the opinions of the paper even if they in single<br />
matters are not shared by the publisher or the board. […] The editor carries<br />
the judicial responsibility for the paper, <strong>and</strong> has the full <strong>and</strong> personal<br />
responsibility for the contents of the newspaper. The editor directs <strong>and</strong> is<br />
responsible for the activities of the members of the editorial department <strong>and</strong><br />
is the link between them <strong>and</strong> the publisher/board.” 86<br />
This agreement between the Association of Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> the Norwegian Media<br />
Business Association, makes a distinction between the editorial work <strong>and</strong> other businesses.<br />
Hence, the media have made an arrangement where editorial considerations, <strong>and</strong> not other<br />
purposes, will guide journalism. If the owner, the board or others should be concerned with<br />
the content, the culprit is the editor, solely. Denmark has adopted a similar declaration. 87 In<br />
Sweden, this arrangement is included in the constitution. 88 Further, several aspects of<br />
integrity are emphasised in the codes of conduct to ensure ethical adherence for press<br />
freedom in practice. 89 The maintaining of integrity will also include elements such as<br />
journalism without licensing, free entrance into the profession, <strong>and</strong> increased education.<br />
Despite these arrangements to ensure independence <strong>and</strong> intregrity, criticism about<br />
how commercial forces influence media content is still relevant. The commercialisation<br />
has found its ways into Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media, as in other countries, even if the owner <strong>and</strong><br />
board respect the principle that they should not interfere with editorial matters.<br />
From the angle of the authorities, the question is how these behave when conflicts<br />
with journalists arise. Compared to other countries, very few cases of harassment are<br />
reported from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media. 90 However, a typical conflict between authorities <strong>and</strong><br />
the press can be search for journalists’ sources. A particular purpose in such conflicts may<br />
86 The Association of Norwegian Editors, “Redaktørplakaten”. The English version is provided by<br />
correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 10 th February, 2005.<br />
87 Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 83.<br />
88 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 10 th February, 2005.<br />
89 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, articles 2.1-2.9.<br />
90 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 194, 217 <strong>and</strong> 238.<br />
77
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
be the police’s need to know sources for solving a crime case. In Norway, the law gives<br />
courts authority to claim knowledge about sources. However, the code of conduct does not<br />
allow journalists to reveal any confidential source. In these cases journalists usually refuse<br />
to give any information despite penalties. 91 Another issue is how editorial departments are<br />
protected against a police search, similar to offices of lawyers <strong>and</strong> doctors. If the police<br />
need a search they have to follow an arrangement together with the editor <strong>and</strong> then bring<br />
the items to court. 92<br />
Private actors have the possibility to harass media through use of courts or other<br />
means. Civil proceedings against media are of course common in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia but these are<br />
not considered serious problems. 93 Possibilities of compensations in civil libel cases are<br />
relatively limited in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian laws. 94<br />
The case study in this section digs deep into a matter where a private individual<br />
tried to interfere with a newspaper’s coverage. Tensions among two gangs in Oslo resulted<br />
in January 2001 in assassination of one person followed by great attention in the media.<br />
Verdens Gang, the largest newspaper in Norway, published name <strong>and</strong> picture of the<br />
suspected culprit. His brother then showed up at the newspaper office <strong>and</strong> dem<strong>and</strong>ed an<br />
end to the coverage of his brother. A conversation with one of the journalists <strong>and</strong> a deputy<br />
editor included threats, understood as serious threats of murder. Knowledge about the<br />
gang’s capacity <strong>and</strong> weapons supported such an impression.<br />
These serious threats ended up in court which decided that the purpose of the<br />
threats was to stop the press’ negative reporting about his brother. Further, it stated: “In a<br />
democratic society it is of fundamental importance to ensure a free <strong>and</strong> independent press –<br />
not only towards the authorities, but towards individuals who are subject to close <strong>and</strong><br />
91 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 314-344.<br />
92 The Norwegian Government, “Straffeprosessloven”, Article 197, 198 <strong>and</strong> 200. This law is available in<br />
Norwegian on: http://www.lovdata.no/all/nl-19810522-025.html, downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />
93 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 194, 217 <strong>and</strong> 238.<br />
94 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 770-771.<br />
78
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
critical reporting too.” The conclusion was that the harshness of sentence in such a context<br />
should be distinctly higher than that in an ordinary case of threats. It was the prosecuting<br />
authority who brought the case to court. 95<br />
The case illustrates how journalistic activities in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia enjoy extraordinary<br />
protection. This is similar to, for instance, protection of public officials or police on duty<br />
because of the media’s important function in society. This case shows the level that press<br />
freedom has reached in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> explains why these countries rank at the top of<br />
press freedom in the world. 96<br />
95 Den norske Advokatforening, Norsk Retstidende : 2002 (Oslo: Den norske Advokatforening, 2002), p. 1206.<br />
96 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, p. 88.<br />
79
Chapter 4: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The press in colonial East Africa had to serve the purposes of the colonial rulers. Therefore<br />
the press brought the information they needed, <strong>and</strong> was turned into propag<strong>and</strong>a to promote<br />
their interests. The new African elite who succeeded as rulers after independence contin-<br />
ued to use mass media to consolidate their positions. However, democratisation in East<br />
Africa have resulted in increased press freedom.<br />
The notion of press freedom in East Africa is to a large extent fashioned on<br />
Western concepts <strong>and</strong> can be examined in two main parts. First, is the East African context<br />
on how press freedom developed, forces influencing the growth of press freedom, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
of position mass media in societies. Second, are the four aspects of press freedom that<br />
include media’s role, freedom to gather information, freedom to publish, <strong>and</strong> protection of<br />
journalistic activities.<br />
The East African Context<br />
The East African countries Kenya, Ug<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> Tanzania have a similar history as<br />
colonies. Despite differences after independence, there are many similarities in democratic,<br />
legal <strong>and</strong> cultural traditions as well as notions of press freedom <strong>and</strong> mass media’s position<br />
in these countries. Kenya is to some degree representative of these East African countries.<br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
The missionaries started, <strong>and</strong> then white settlers <strong>and</strong> the colonial administration introduced<br />
printed press to Africa. 1 Patterns <strong>and</strong> trends of media <strong>and</strong> press freedom history in East<br />
Africa are similar. 2 The first printed periodical in East Africa was probably Taveta<br />
1 Abuoga, John Baptist <strong>and</strong> Mutere, Absalom Aggrey, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya (Nairobi: The<br />
African Council on Communication Education, 1988), pp. 4-5 <strong>and</strong> 109.<br />
2 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 57.<br />
80
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Chronicle, published quarterly by missionaires from 1895. During a few years, several<br />
newsletters, journals <strong>and</strong> even the newspaper The African St<strong>and</strong>ard, in 1902, were laun-<br />
ched. Activities by European settlers <strong>and</strong> missionaires initiated most of these publications<br />
which used European as well as Indian, Arabic, Swahili <strong>and</strong> Kikuyu languages. The first<br />
indigenous papers, made by Africans for their own purposes, did not appear before the<br />
1920s. The first was the Swahili Tangazo. A few years later was Muigwithania founded by<br />
the Kikuyu Central Association with Jomo Kenyatta as its first editor. 3<br />
The British ruled Kenya from around 1890 <strong>and</strong> declared it a colony in 1920. 4<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a fell under British control from 1900. 5 Tanganyika was transferred from Germany<br />
to Britain after First World War. 6 In early days of colonial rule relations between<br />
authorities <strong>and</strong> the press were harmonious. As controversies between authorities <strong>and</strong><br />
indigenous people rose, such conflicts became issues in the press. Colonial authorities<br />
started to turn to the press to further their interests. An attempt in Kenya was to publish<br />
Habari by the Native Affairs Department. The aim was to give literate Africans a moderate<br />
paper supporting official policies to avoid growth of papers that rejected the government,<br />
Europeans <strong>and</strong> Christianity. 7 Another step in this initially moderate policy was when the<br />
British in 1927 introduced the first radio in black Africa in Kenya. 8<br />
The British press freedom <strong>and</strong> information policy in colonial East Africa came to<br />
be a dual history. On one h<strong>and</strong>, the British were influenced by philosophy which gave rise<br />
to such ideas as liberty, democracy, public participation <strong>and</strong> hence need for free informa-<br />
tion. On the other h<strong>and</strong>, to achieve control in East Africa became more important than<br />
3<br />
Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 4-10.<br />
4<br />
Sayer, Geoff, Kenya : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile (Oxford: Oxfam,<br />
2004 [1998]), pp. 16-17; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, p. 11.<br />
5<br />
Leggett, Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. 16-17.<br />
6<br />
Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia, p. 724.<br />
7<br />
Ibid., pp. 8 <strong>and</strong> 13-17.<br />
8<br />
Nwosu, Ikechukwu, “An Overview of the Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society” in Domatob, Jerry, Jika,<br />
Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society (Nairobi: The African<br />
Council on Communication Education, 1987), p. 6.<br />
81
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
introducing democratic ideals. The press became a useful tool to introduce <strong>and</strong> support the<br />
colonial policies. The emerging hostile indigenous press had to be bridled <strong>and</strong> suppressed,<br />
<strong>and</strong> the British made colonial legislation to do so. 9<br />
Kenya’s colonial government’s State of Emergency from 1952 to 1960 is important<br />
for the history of press freedom in East Africa. The struggle between Kenyans <strong>and</strong> colonial<br />
masters increased from the 1920s to its peak during the Mau Mau war in the 1950s. During<br />
the State of Emergency, 1.5 million Kenyans were detained in camps or in villages of<br />
similar purpose. The press was treated as in war, including a propag<strong>and</strong>a war, targeting<br />
Kenyan, British <strong>and</strong> other foreign media. Yet, articles such as “Gestapo way in Kenya” <strong>and</strong><br />
other similar ones emerged in Engl<strong>and</strong>. Despite this, the colonial government did<br />
everything to silence sources, prohibit any contact between its staff <strong>and</strong> soldiers with<br />
journalists, denying facts <strong>and</strong> cover information which was not in favour of the British in<br />
Kenya. The means there were regulations as well as prosecuting, scaring <strong>and</strong> defaming<br />
sources to control the press. 10<br />
As a reaction to how mainstream media reflected the colonial rulers, a number of<br />
underground newspapers come into existence in Kenya. Out of this grew an alternative<br />
press as opposition to the mainstream press. 11 Despite nicknames as gutter press or similar,<br />
these newspapers have been included in the mainstream political process. 12<br />
Around 1960, most African colonies got their independence. The East African<br />
countries gained freedom between 1961-63. The transforming to African rule ensured an<br />
almost status quo in structures of power <strong>and</strong> economics. A new African elite emerged with<br />
similar interests to European colonial masters <strong>and</strong> settlers. Africans got the political<br />
9 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 49-52.<br />
10 Elkins, Caroline, Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya (London: Jonathan Cape, 2005), pp.<br />
46-47, 54-55, 84, 274, 284-292, 307 <strong>and</strong> 344-349; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 66-67.<br />
11 Karanja, Mugambi, “Growth of print media in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />
culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />
2000), pp. 27-28, 31 <strong>and</strong> 33.<br />
12 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 219.<br />
82
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
authority, but Europeans continued to own a lot of l<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> business. The socio-economic<br />
hierarchy was not challenged much. The printed press became a part of this pattern <strong>and</strong> an<br />
arena for the ruling elite’s issues, values, matters <strong>and</strong> interests. 13 At that time the press was<br />
supposed to promote development <strong>and</strong> nation building, in reality a manipulation where the<br />
press had to serve the elite <strong>and</strong> not democratisation. 14<br />
Media laws from the colonial era survived independence in Kenya, 15 Ug<strong>and</strong>a 16 <strong>and</strong><br />
Tanzania. 17 Colonial administration’s media laws to control <strong>and</strong> manipulate the colonies<br />
became useful instruments of the new ruling elite. 18 For instance, laws on ‘false news<br />
offence’ were introduced <strong>and</strong> are still valid in East Africa even though Engl<strong>and</strong> abolished<br />
them in 1887. 19<br />
Independent East Africa has many examples of harassing of editors <strong>and</strong> journalists<br />
with or without lawsuits as well as banning of publications. 20 Another way was to national-<br />
ise media, such as the Tanzanian President Julius K. Nyerere did in accordance with his<br />
policy of Africanisation. 21 In Kenya, the colonial administration had established TV as a<br />
private company just before independence. President Jomo Kenyatta became suspicious of<br />
13<br />
Ibid., pp. 70-72; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 26-27, 77-81 <strong>and</strong> 98-100.<br />
14<br />
Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, pp. 1-5.<br />
15<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 58-60 <strong>and</strong> 67.<br />
16<br />
Kemigisha, Rose Mary (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong><br />
<strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Foundation, 1998), p. 1.<br />
17<br />
Kilimwiko, Lawrence <strong>and</strong> Mapunda, Joseph (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania (Dar<br />
es Salaam/Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong>, Friedrich Ebert Foundation; <strong>and</strong> Association of<br />
Journalists <strong>and</strong> Media Workers, 1998), p. 2.<br />
18<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 63.<br />
19<br />
The East African, “Media <strong>and</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: Ug<strong>and</strong>a Supreme Court Kicks Out Colonial Law” in The East<br />
African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004, pp. 8 <strong>and</strong> 10.<br />
20<br />
Ibid., pp. 72-79, Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. v <strong>and</strong> 7-10, Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong><br />
Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 3 <strong>and</strong> 6.<br />
21<br />
Nyerere, Julius K., ”The Arusha Declaration: Socialism <strong>and</strong> Self-Reliance” in <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Socialism : A<br />
Selection From Writings <strong>and</strong> Speeches 1965-1967 (Dar es Salaam/London: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
1968), pp. 231-234, Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania,<br />
pp. vii-viii; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, p. 34.<br />
83
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
the motives. So, despite Kenya’s privatisation policy, the broadcasting company became<br />
nationalised <strong>and</strong> subordinate to the Information Ministry. 22<br />
Nairobi has grown up to be a center of journalist education in Africa. IPI, one of the<br />
NGOs concerned with global spread of press freedom, considered around 1960 that it was<br />
crucial to educate African journalists <strong>and</strong> editors to be able to take over <strong>and</strong> run a democra-<br />
tic press. At independence, media were mostly run by Europeans. During the 1960s, 318<br />
journalists from 18 countries participated in half year courses in Nairobi or Lagos under<br />
the auspices of the IPI. 23 These journalism courses at Nairobi College were a predecessor<br />
for the establishment of Kenya’s first permanent journalism education, at the Nairobi<br />
Univeristy in the 1970s. 24 In Ug<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> Tanzania limitations of adequate journalistic<br />
education institutions is pointed out as a hindrance to development of mass media. 25<br />
The rich variety of media associations in East Africa indicates that ‘interests of the<br />
press’ are not one coherent subject or are not yet carved out. 26 These are as wide-spread as<br />
labor unions, owner associations, The Association of Media Women in Kenya as well as<br />
community based fellowships. Despite the spread of interests, such organisations together<br />
play a role within the civil society where these are agents for media’s interests including<br />
press freedom. 27 Moreover, such organisations often participate in international unions<br />
with fellows from other countries, or as members of international NGOs. In this way these<br />
associations make up strings from East Africa to a global network concerned with mass<br />
media issues. These organisations can act as powerful lobbyists <strong>and</strong> are important players<br />
from an international relations perspective. The presence of a significant branch of<br />
22<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 82-93.<br />
23<br />
Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp. 109-169; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years,<br />
pp. 80-87.<br />
24<br />
Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, p. 128.<br />
25<br />
Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. 3; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book<br />
on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. viii, xi <strong>and</strong> 50-60.<br />
26<br />
Kadhi, Joe S. M., “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?” in Kunczik, Michael (ed.), Ethics in<br />
Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), p. 110.<br />
27<br />
Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 85-89; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A<br />
h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 61-73.<br />
84
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
UNESCO in Nairobi, concerned with press freedom, does strengthen the global connect-<br />
ions to East Africa in these matters.<br />
Kenya has enjoyed a higher level of press freedom compared to other developing<br />
countries. 28 One reason may be the education of journalists in the country. 29 The level <strong>and</strong><br />
variety of journalism education in Kenya is among the highest in Africa. 30 Nairobi has<br />
emerged as the media centre in East <strong>and</strong> Central Africa. 31 In independent Kenya, press<br />
freedom has had its ups <strong>and</strong> downs. Due to weak legal protection, press freedom in Kenya<br />
has been dependent on politicians’ interpretation <strong>and</strong> goodwill. 32 While press freedom has<br />
been improved 33 there are occasions when journalists <strong>and</strong> editors are questionned <strong>and</strong><br />
imprisoned. 34<br />
A chronological survey of some changes in Kenyan press freedom shows that the<br />
colonial rulers just before independence still maintained a strong regime towards the press.<br />
Even new restrictions were still introduced. 35 Emergence of the Nation newspapers in 1960<br />
marked a milestone. Despite foreign ownership, these newspapers were staffed with<br />
Africans <strong>and</strong> added Kenyan opinions within mainstream media. 36<br />
Optimism on press freedom was quickly reduced after independence when new<br />
rulers started to manipulate media <strong>and</strong> news for their propag<strong>and</strong>a purposes. 37 Criticism of<br />
government <strong>and</strong> the president resulted in silencing of editors. 38 Even worse became the<br />
28 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 215.<br />
29 Coppard, Kit, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part II:<br />
1976-1988 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988), p. 43.<br />
30 Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 253.<br />
31<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 91.<br />
32<br />
Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 79-80.<br />
33<br />
Bindra, Sunny, “The real achievement of 2003 is an open society” in Sunday Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), commentary, 21 st December, 2003.<br />
34<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, p. 27-28.<br />
35<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 70.<br />
36<br />
Ibid., pp. 71-72; <strong>and</strong> Odero, Mitch, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther<br />
(eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich<br />
Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 11-13.<br />
37<br />
Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 122.<br />
38 Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 15.<br />
85
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
suppressing of critical voices within the press after the assassination of the Planning <strong>and</strong><br />
Economic Affairs Minister Tom Mboya in 1969. President Kenyatta used the political<br />
crises to force on performance of media that ensured the victory in the election the same<br />
year. 39 Banning of media became common. Newspapers <strong>and</strong> magazines had to support<br />
government to survive. During the presidencies of both Kenyatta <strong>and</strong> Daniel arap Moi<br />
there were periods where the press had no space to perform any democratic role. 40 Yet, the<br />
1970s <strong>and</strong> up to 1982, the end of Kenyatta’s <strong>and</strong> beginning of Moi’s eras, was a period<br />
where the press had some breathing space. Several newspapers were established, but poor<br />
markets made it difficult to keep on. 41<br />
The attempt of coup d’état in 1982 marked a change in press freedom. President<br />
Moi emphasised his ‘nyayo’ philosophy. That means that anyone, media included, had to<br />
subordinate themselves to the Head of State who acted as the nation’s father figure. Kenya<br />
entered an era of dictatorship. 42 The underground alternative press recurred as the<br />
opposition’s channel of information. Further, some critical magazines set st<strong>and</strong>ards of<br />
courage in this hostile era where media often were banned. Nairobi Law Monthly, Finance,<br />
Financial Review, Society, Beyond <strong>and</strong> Development Agenda were capable to express<br />
opinions towards the dictatorship, <strong>and</strong> became pioneers for renewed democratisation<br />
including an independent press. 43 Due to human rights offences, Kenya was under<br />
international pressure. Foreign correspondents in Nairobi were carefully watched. 44<br />
Foreign funding of critical magazines indicated how international actors were concerned<br />
39 Kamau, John, “How Kenyatte gagged the press to manage the Mboya crisis” in Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 25 th April, 2004.<br />
40 Kamau, John, “When You Had to Shut up or Languish in Prison for Years” in Media Review, a pull-out in<br />
eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 38-41.<br />
41 Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, pp. 15-17; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 74-75.<br />
42<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 58 <strong>and</strong> 118; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 75.<br />
43<br />
Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, pp. 38-39; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 75-<br />
79 <strong>and</strong> 302-303.<br />
44<br />
Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, pp. 19-22.<br />
86
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
with press freedom in Kenya. 45 From 1990 restoration of freedom of expression became a<br />
condition for the United States’ aid to Kenya. 46<br />
In 1991 multi party system was introduced <strong>and</strong> a corresponding growth of plurality<br />
in media followed. 47 The alternative press mushroomed, which also proved Kenya as an<br />
ethnically fractured society. In this way the alternative press became means of partisanism<br />
<strong>and</strong> ethnic journalism. 48 Critical journalism started to recur in mainstream media. 49 One<br />
issue that illustrated the press’ new role was how the state was no longer the only actor in<br />
making laws. Civil society participated in a public debate in media <strong>and</strong> started to influence<br />
law making. 50<br />
However, three examples illustrate that these still operated under difficult<br />
circumstances. First, in 1993 the police dismantled vital parts of Fotoform Ltd.’s printing<br />
machine <strong>and</strong> seized what they considered as seditious publications. Fotoform printed<br />
Society, Economic Review, Finance <strong>and</strong> Nairobi Law Monthly. The latter was banned at<br />
that time. Several people were arrested in related cases. 51 Second, a new Defamation Act<br />
was passed in 1992 that was seemingly designed to protect politicians. In the wake of the<br />
murder of Foreign Minister Robert Ouko in 1990, several media reports ended up in court.<br />
Nairobi lawyer George Oraro was in 1993 awarded about US$ 19,000, fifteen times more<br />
than in any other libel case. In 1999 Justice Evans Gichuru of Court of Appeal was<br />
awarded US$ 28,000 <strong>and</strong> Minister Nicholas Biwott was awarded US$ 390,000. The<br />
45<br />
Munene, Macharia, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual Warriors”, paper<br />
presented in the University of Illinois NEH Seminar, African Studies in Africa, 11 th – 15 th November,<br />
2002, p. 8.<br />
46<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 79.<br />
47<br />
Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, p. 39<br />
48<br />
Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 103; <strong>and</strong> Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “The<br />
mass media <strong>and</strong> democracy: Underst<strong>and</strong>ing the problem of objectivity in multicultural settings” in Odero,<br />
Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />
Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 203 <strong>and</strong> 219.<br />
49<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 189.<br />
50<br />
Mute, Lawrence Murugu, “Media policy in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />
culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />
2000), p. 148.<br />
51<br />
Ibid., p. 145; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 301-304.<br />
87
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
practice of these huge compensations made media careful <strong>and</strong> enforced self-censorship. 52<br />
Third, in 1997 President Moi wanted to avoid extensive attention to ethnic clashes. He<br />
used the Public Security Act <strong>and</strong> curfew to deny journalists entrance into actual areas of<br />
conflict <strong>and</strong> reduced media’s ability to cover those events. 53<br />
However, the level of press freedom increased through the 1990s. A milestone was<br />
liberalisation of the airwaves even if the first private actors entered broadcasting as result<br />
of political fraternity or struggles in court. 54 An attempt to reduce laws about media has not<br />
been successful. Still, there are about 14 Acts which have implications for media. 55 The<br />
greatest threat to press freedom in Kenya at present under Presiden Mwai Kibaki is<br />
probably self-censorship due to strong laws on defamation <strong>and</strong> sedition as well as<br />
contempt of court <strong>and</strong> freedom of speech. 56 Despite self-censorship, media’s activities in<br />
Kenya have shown that a free <strong>and</strong> vibrant press can be useful in effecting transparency,<br />
democracy <strong>and</strong> good governance. 57 The alternative press has still an ethnic feature. Yet,<br />
several of the most controversial cases latter years have come up through the alternative<br />
press <strong>and</strong> then been picked up by the mainstream media. 58 The Kenyan press seems to<br />
perform its role without direct intereference from government 59 although the broadcast<br />
media are still subjected to attempts of control 60 <strong>and</strong> although President Kibaki’s position<br />
52<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-183 <strong>and</strong> 192-201.<br />
53<br />
Okello, Rosemary, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />
culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />
2000), p. 160.<br />
54<br />
Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, pp. 33-39.<br />
55<br />
Okello, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future”, p. 158.<br />
56<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-190, 256, 272-277, 312-313 <strong>and</strong> 326. One example: Ogutu,<br />
Judy, “Mwau seeks orders to bar ‘The St<strong>and</strong>ard’ ” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news<br />
article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
57<br />
Munene, G. Macharia, “Historical Perspectives on Politics <strong>and</strong> Journalism” in Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting<br />
Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education, 1994), p. 50.<br />
58 st<br />
Oral interview with Kodi Barth, Lecturer of Journalism at USIU, Nairobi, in his office at USIU, 1<br />
September, 2004. E-mail: kbarth@usiu.ac.ke.<br />
59<br />
Kadhi, Joe, in his address at The Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on “Is There a Place for<br />
Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005. Kadhi is member of The<br />
Media Council of Kenya; <strong>and</strong> Head of Extended Studies <strong>and</strong> Journalist in Residence at USIU, Nairobi.<br />
60<br />
Daily Nation, “Tuju’s order to censor broadcasts ‘is illegal’ ” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />
Group), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
88
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
is that Kenyans shall enjoy unlimited press freedom because it entrenches development<br />
structures. 61 The government has stated that it supports a system of self-regulation. 62<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a encourages private actors in the media <strong>and</strong> the print media operate like<br />
other businesses. Nevertheless, in Ug<strong>and</strong>a the government is frequently hostile to media. 63<br />
Common methods of control are questioning, charging, imprisoning as well as demonising<br />
or sc<strong>and</strong>alising journalists. For instance, the Ug<strong>and</strong>an journalist <strong>and</strong> editor Charles<br />
Onyango-Obbo was, between 1997 <strong>and</strong> 2003, arrested three times <strong>and</strong> brought before court<br />
120 times. Ug<strong>and</strong>an journalists, however, have not been targets of assassinations as was<br />
the case during the regimes of Obote <strong>and</strong> Amin. 64<br />
Broadcast media have to pay fees. For non-commercial actors these fees are a<br />
heavy burden. A radio station in Kampala has to pay US$ 1,500 annually. Many<br />
broadcasters are struggling to avoid bankruptcy. 65 The Penal Code still bans publishing on<br />
a wide range of information. 66 Unexpectedly, in 2004 Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s Supreme Court ruled that<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s laws, from the colonial era, on ‘false news offence’ were unconstitutional. 67<br />
Tanzanian press freedom is far behind Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. There is freedom of<br />
expression in the Constitution, but about 40 laws make up a web of hindrances against free<br />
press. After pressure, the government started a process to review media laws <strong>and</strong> prepare<br />
61<br />
The Kenyan Government, “Why Mwai Kibaki does not speak out on everything” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), advertisement, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
62<br />
Daily Nation, “Government set to review press laws, says Kiraitu” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />
Group), news article, 5th April, 2004.<br />
63<br />
Wakabi, Wairagala, “Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a Still Have Though <strong>Press</strong> Laws” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 19th April, 2004.<br />
64<br />
Oral interview with Charles Onyango-Obbo, Managing Editor of Convergence <strong>and</strong> Syndication, Nation<br />
Media Group Ltd. in Kenya, e-mail: cobbo@nation.co.ke. Former editor of the newspaper The Monitor in<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Interview with him in his office in Nairobi 21 st February, 2005, about press freedom in Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
65<br />
Nakkazi, Esther, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), news article, 12th January, 2004.<br />
66<br />
Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. 7-8.<br />
67 th<br />
Supreme Court of Ug<strong>and</strong>a, judgement dated 11 February, 2004, on an appeal in Monitor v. Constitutional<br />
Court, judgement published 21 st July, 2000. The judgement is published in full by The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004, pp. 8-10 <strong>and</strong> 16-17.<br />
89
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
for open information policy. The review is expected to conclude in 2006. 68 The most<br />
important laws are The Penal Code (on sedition), The National Security Act, The<br />
Newspapers Act, The Broadcasting Service Act, Prisons Act 69 <strong>and</strong> a new Terrorism Act. 70<br />
Tanzania was a socialistic one-party state under President Julius K. Nyerere. In 1992 a<br />
liberalisation process including the media started <strong>and</strong> media’s role in development was<br />
emphasised. An experience from the time before 1992 was how political dependency<br />
reduced trust in media resulting in declined circulation. 71 Still, after liberalisation, the<br />
media experienced harassment, searching, questioning, imprisonment <strong>and</strong> even stripping of<br />
citizenship. At the same time, journalists friendly to government received favours such as<br />
transport <strong>and</strong> access to information. 72<br />
Tanzania is, except South Africa, the African country south of Sahara with the<br />
largest diversified media industry. 73 Regarding quality, Tanzanian media do not have such<br />
a prominent position in Africa. It is noteworthy that Tanzania in 2004 waived some taxes<br />
on the media industry. In addition, The Media Council established in 1999 contributed<br />
significantly to conflict mediation. The number of media cases in courts declined<br />
considerably. 74<br />
Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Three forces have surrounded the growth of press freedom in East Africa. First, is<br />
ownership in general as well as global media <strong>and</strong> foreign owners’ impact on press<br />
68<br />
Oral interview with Theophil Makunga, Consulting Editor of Taifa Leo, Nation Media Group Ltd. in<br />
Kenya, e-mail: tmakunga@nation.co.ke. Former Editor-in-Chief of Majira <strong>and</strong> Managing Editor of<br />
Mwananchi, both Tanzanian newspapers. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi 1 st March, 2005,<br />
about press freedom in Tanzania.<br />
69<br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 1-9.<br />
70<br />
Oral interview with Makunga.<br />
71<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 123.<br />
72<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 48; <strong>and</strong> oral interview with Makunga.<br />
73<br />
Kivikuru, Ullamaija, “From State Socialism to Deregulation” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi<br />
(eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 140-141; <strong>and</strong><br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. vii.<br />
74<br />
Oral interview with Makunga.<br />
90
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
freedom. Second, African elite classes hamper press freedom. Third, is the press freedom’s<br />
role in national development.<br />
First, despite the mushrooming of media in Kenya, there is concentration on the<br />
owners’ side. These owners are involved with the political <strong>and</strong> business elites. Politics<br />
have been determinant in allocating of broadcasting licenses. There are no legal regulation<br />
of how extensive ownership single actors can buy in media. Five units control mainstream<br />
media in Kenya. These are Nation Media Group, St<strong>and</strong>ard Group, Royal Media, The<br />
People Daily <strong>and</strong> Kenya Times. The last two started late <strong>and</strong> remained marginalised. Due<br />
to this situation, press freedom in Kenya operates within a framework made up by a few. In<br />
addition, the state owned Kenya Broadcasting Service (KBC) has a national TV <strong>and</strong><br />
several radio channels. 75<br />
Nation Media Group is known for its newspapers, radio <strong>and</strong> TV which all are<br />
named ‘Nation’. In addition, the group has engagements in several newspapers, magazines<br />
<strong>and</strong> broadcasting stations in all of the East African countries. The Aga Khan, leader of the<br />
Ismaili Muslim sect, is the founder <strong>and</strong> major owner with 45% of the shares. 76 The Aga<br />
Khan has a lot of business in Kenya. These are media, schools, hospitals <strong>and</strong> hotels.<br />
Nation’s media are considered as business friendly. The Aga Khan is known to influence<br />
politics in Kenya by media <strong>and</strong> networking, to ensure good conditions for his business. 77<br />
Indirect support is achieved by how his media advocate a multicultural nation governed on<br />
opportunities for all. 78 Nation’s media supported the new NARC government <strong>and</strong> President<br />
Kibaki during last election in 2002. 79<br />
75 Oral interview with Barth.<br />
76 Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003 (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group, 2004), pp. 10-11 <strong>and</strong> 42.<br />
77 Oral interview with W. Kwendo Opanga, Executive Editor of The St<strong>and</strong>ard/Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard, in his office<br />
in St<strong>and</strong>ard, 10 th April, 2005. E-mail: opashw@east<strong>and</strong>ard.net.<br />
78 Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, p. 35.<br />
79 Oral interview with Barth.<br />
91
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard Group’s most prominent media are the newspapers The St<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong><br />
Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong> the TV station KTN. 80 The St<strong>and</strong>ard had for the most part good<br />
relations with the presidents Kenyatta <strong>and</strong> Moi. The given reason was that St<strong>and</strong>ard’s<br />
business benefitted from these relations. 81 Powerful individuals during Moi’s <strong>and</strong> KANU’s<br />
regime were major shareholders before the election in 2002, <strong>and</strong> used their power to<br />
influence St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media. Now, these shares are sold to foreign companies probably<br />
controlled by the same individuals. However, after the loss in the 2002 election <strong>and</strong><br />
transforming to ‘invisible foreign owners’, they have not interfered with journalism in<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media. Their declared objective is that St<strong>and</strong>ard shall make a good profit.<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media are also considered as business friendly. Kibaki’s government consider<br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard as an enemy due the the newspaper’s mainly adversarial position. 82<br />
Royal Media is owned by Samuel K. Macharia. Citizen FM <strong>and</strong> Citizen TV are the<br />
most known media of this group which has several other radio stations as well. It is<br />
estimated that Royal Media’s potential listenership is 70% of all Kenyans. 83 In 1990 the<br />
first private actors entered broadcasting in Kenya. Macharia considered it as a business<br />
opportunity, <strong>and</strong> applied for licence which was rejected. 84 After a battle in court, President<br />
Moi in 1997 promised broadcast license in exhange for political support. The honeymoon<br />
with Moi became short. For a year, Macharia’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV stations were banned. In the<br />
2002 election, Citizen’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV were major supporters for President Kibaki. During<br />
the two last years, Macharia has got licences <strong>and</strong> been able to launch five new FM stations.<br />
He is regarded as close to Kibaki’s government. 85<br />
80<br />
Ibid.<br />
81<br />
Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 19.<br />
82<br />
Oral interview with Opanga.<br />
83<br />
Wachira, Nick, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 22 nd March, 2005.<br />
84<br />
Makali, David, “Progress <strong>and</strong> Problems in Freeing Kenya’s Airwaves” in Media Review, a pull-out in<br />
eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 13-14 <strong>and</strong> 18.<br />
85<br />
Wachira, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?”<br />
92
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Foreign owners have had major shares in East African media. Further, East African<br />
media have to operate within the regime of global media. Both factors limit their freedom.<br />
Put to an extreme, Tom Mboya stated that Kenya achieved independence despite the world<br />
press. 86 East African mass media do not work in a vacuum. Their content depends on<br />
foreign sources <strong>and</strong> news agencies. 87 Advertisement income depends on foreign global<br />
business <strong>and</strong> its preferences. 88 Media ideology is a result of Western capitalistic concepts. 89<br />
Hence, East African media are wrapped up in a web made by global media. One view is<br />
that this is how global forces secure universal spread of press freedom. A competing view<br />
is that East African media are slaves of a global media regime <strong>and</strong> have lost freedom to<br />
play their own unique role. According to the latter, one allegation is that such a Western<br />
ideological press would never liberate the third world. 90<br />
Foreign owned media were initially nationalised in Tanzania <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Kenya<br />
allowed the presence of foreign owners <strong>and</strong> precipitated recurring debates about their role<br />
<strong>and</strong> purposes. One claim is that foreigners were the only ones strong enough to resist<br />
pressure from Kenyan authorities. Foreign ownership was thus a security for press<br />
freedom. Another claim was that foreign owners through Kenyan media can interfere with<br />
domestic affairs. This made foreign ownership an agent for foreign interests. A third view<br />
was that owners were owners, <strong>and</strong> both locals <strong>and</strong> foreigners were pursuing their media<br />
business according to commercial interests. In that case, the question was not about foreign<br />
ownership, it was on how private media operate as agents for capitalistic interests. 91 If<br />
86<br />
Mboya, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa”, p 144.<br />
87<br />
Paterson, “Global Battlefields”, pp. 79-81.<br />
88<br />
Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, pp. 226-232; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga<br />
<strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 94-95.<br />
89<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 60-61; <strong>and</strong> Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological<br />
Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, pp. 55-56.<br />
90<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 49.<br />
91<br />
Mytton, Graham, Mass Communication in Africa (London: Edward Arnold Publishers, 1983), p. 19,<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 52, 55, 115 <strong>and</strong> 167, Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 71.<br />
93
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
profit is the sole purpose, such media owners would be vulnerable to corrupt practices as<br />
well as economic arrangements. 92<br />
Second, African elite tend to hamper press freedom <strong>and</strong> benefitted from the<br />
structures of the colonial system. Therefore, despite national liberation, these did not have<br />
the interest of press freedom at all. 93 The mass media were rather considered as vehicles<br />
for the rulers. 94 As a result, mass media were manipulated to be propag<strong>and</strong>a organs. 95 They<br />
justified control of media on grounds such as national unity, stability, development, culture<br />
<strong>and</strong> religion. The hidden selfish interest was to gain monopoly over state resources<br />
including information flow <strong>and</strong> media. So, the ruling elite manipulated public opinion. 96<br />
Democratisation processes have relied on this suppression of media, but many legal<br />
instruments such as defamation <strong>and</strong> false news are still valid <strong>and</strong> serve powerful<br />
individuals to control media. 97 One result is self-censorship to avoid conflicts. This<br />
weakness of press freedom is articulated by the senior Kenyan journalist <strong>and</strong> editor, Philip<br />
Ochieng, in this way: “…<strong>and</strong> freedom of the <strong>Press</strong> became widespread. But we proved<br />
totally unable to exploit it.” 98<br />
Third, there appeared to be contradictions between press freedom <strong>and</strong> national<br />
development. The core is a mix of press freedom with other purposes. Nyerere emphasised<br />
development including use of media. Nyerere wrote: “<strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> development are as<br />
completely linked together as chickens <strong>and</strong> eggs… without freedom you get no<br />
development.” 99 Further, he stated that in a country faced with poverty, press freedom<br />
92<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> , pp. 167-170.<br />
93<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 57.<br />
94<br />
Mytton, Mass Communication in Africa, pp. 42-43.<br />
95<br />
Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 122.<br />
96<br />
An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, pp. 23-24.<br />
97<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 58-59 <strong>and</strong> 114-124.<br />
98<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 192.<br />
99<br />
Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 247.<br />
94
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
should be limited just as liberal democracies had done in wartime. 100 Besides these,<br />
Tanzanian media were bound by development as a national ideology. 101 Thoughts similar<br />
to Nyerere’s wrapped into such terms as ‘national unity’ became widespread in Africa. 102<br />
Put to an extreme it could be interpreted as building loyalty to the ‘national father’ as<br />
during President Daniel arap Moi’s regime in Kenya. 103 However, press freedom <strong>and</strong><br />
media have been inextricably connected with a development agenda in Africa. 104<br />
‘Development journalism’ seems initially to be in tune with ‘social responsibility’<br />
but this is not necessarily the case. First there are assumptions that the audience will<br />
behave in expected ways, that they would accept media’s messages, <strong>and</strong> that media’s<br />
content would empower people to develop. It does not always happen. 105 In addition, it is<br />
argued that development issues do not work as attractive content in a way dem<strong>and</strong>ed by<br />
commercialised news values. 106 Second, ‘development journalism’ is said to be just<br />
another idea of the authoritarian press system which was a Soviet practice. 107<br />
‘Development’ will determine the framework for ‘truth’. Such a philosophy can be used to<br />
justify lying <strong>and</strong> limit information flow to ‘pedagogically skilful’ content. So, media’s role<br />
can be controlled to stabilise the regime <strong>and</strong> journalists would not be allowed to critisise. 108<br />
The whole game of building national image by using national <strong>and</strong> international<br />
media is included in this objection. 109 Development journalism was used as a term to alter<br />
100<br />
Mytton, Mass Communication in Africa, p. 59.<br />
101<br />
Kivikuru, “From State Socialism to Deregulation”, p. 150.<br />
102<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 80.<br />
103<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 117-118.<br />
104<br />
Okolo, Dan Edogbo, “Agenda Setting Role of the Mass Media in Political Reporting” in Okigbo, Charles<br />
(ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education,<br />
1994), pp. 31 <strong>and</strong> 34.<br />
105<br />
Ochilo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence”, p. 45.<br />
106<br />
Pol<strong>and</strong>, Kate, “Development Moments: Radio’s Public Face of Development” in Journal of <strong>International</strong><br />
Development (West Sussex, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 2004) volume 16, number 5, July 2004, p. 714.<br />
107<br />
Retief, Johan, Media Ethics : An Introduction to Responsible Journalism (Oxford: Oxford University<br />
<strong>Press</strong>, 2002), pp. 17 <strong>and</strong> 21.<br />
108<br />
Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 251-255.<br />
109<br />
Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, p. 5; <strong>and</strong> Dunn, Kevin C, Imaging the Congo :<br />
the international relations of identity (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003), pp. 3 <strong>and</strong> 124.<br />
95
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
news values in developing countries to turn the press to benefit authorities. 110 Tanzania, as<br />
other African states, established a state owned news agency, SHIHATA, to control<br />
information flow out of the country, ensure Tanzania’s international image <strong>and</strong> support<br />
other political objectives. SHIHATA <strong>and</strong> similar agencies achieved low credibility <strong>and</strong><br />
became unprofitable business. Independent media did not want to pay for a service they<br />
considered to be propag<strong>and</strong>a. 111<br />
When press freedom interacts with other purposes, the performance is a balancing<br />
art. A Kenyan notion of this is summed up by Mitch Odero, Chairman of the Media<br />
Council of Kenya: “Journalism is a national duty. But it is not so much a national duty as<br />
America’s, the homel<strong>and</strong> of freedoms, journalists do in the coverage of Iraq.” 112 In this<br />
statement, he recognised a journalist’s national duty as well as limitations of such a duty.<br />
Mass Media in the Societies<br />
Radio is definitely the most wide-spread mass medium in East Africa. 113 It is because radio<br />
is cheap compared to newspapers <strong>and</strong> TV, <strong>and</strong> because transport <strong>and</strong> illiteracy are no<br />
hindrance for radio. The UNESCO measure of minimal spread of radio is 20 receivers per<br />
1000 inhabitants. Together with radio, TV is ranked as the second most used comm-<br />
unication channel in Africa. 114<br />
Number of radio- <strong>and</strong> TV-receivers pr. 1000 inhabitants (1996) 115<br />
Country TV Radio<br />
Kenya 26 108<br />
Tanzania 3.3 280<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a 16 130<br />
110 Ali, Owais Aslam, “Claiming that Differences in ‘Values’ Justify News Directions” in The World <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston,<br />
USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 2002), pp. 71-73.<br />
111 Kivikuru, “From State Socialism to Deregulation”, pp. 137-140.<br />
112 Odero, Mitch, in his closing address at The Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on “Is There a<br />
Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />
113 Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 1.<br />
114 Ochilo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence”, pp. 43-44.<br />
115 United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 18, pp. 130-137.<br />
96
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Newspapers <strong>and</strong> other print media are regarded as a luxury. Spread of newspapers<br />
is far below UNESCO’s measure for minimum circulation, which is 100 per 1000<br />
inhabitants. 116 US$ 0.5 for a copy is expensive when efficient readership need a copy daily,<br />
<strong>and</strong> the majority do not have more than US$ 1 daily for survival. Poor infrastucture limits<br />
distribution of newspapers to urban areas. Content <strong>and</strong> advertising also indicate that<br />
newspapers are targeting the urban elites. 117<br />
Spread of daily newspapers (1996) 118<br />
Country Number of Total Circulation per<br />
titles circulation 1000 inhabitants<br />
Kenya 4 263,000 9.4<br />
Tanzania 2 40,000 2.1<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a 3 120,000 3.9<br />
The figures are old, 1996, but are used because these are the available ones in both East<br />
Africa <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Since 1996, the number of daily newspapers in Tanzania has<br />
grown to ten; six in Kiswahili <strong>and</strong> four in English. 119<br />
Books are even a more elite medium than newspapers.<br />
Number of new published book titles (1996) 120<br />
Country New book titles Titles per<br />
1000 inhabitants<br />
Kenya (1994) 300 0.011<br />
Tanzania 288 0.009<br />
Ug<strong>and</strong>a 172 0.008<br />
Internet is difficult to measure due to rapid changes. However, one indicator is<br />
Africa’s share of Internet host sites globally. That was 0.025% <strong>and</strong> continued to decline in<br />
1998. 121 The same year Africa’s share of global telecommunication between regions was<br />
116 Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 9.<br />
117 Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 11.<br />
118<br />
United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 16, pp. 117-123.<br />
119<br />
Oral interview with Makunga.<br />
120<br />
United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 15, pp. 111-116.<br />
121 UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 185.<br />
97
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
2.7%. The United States <strong>and</strong> Canada had 55%. 122 If domestic traffic had been included in<br />
these figures, Africa’s share would have dropped further.<br />
Journalistic capacity is another indicator of the press’ potential power. <strong>Press</strong> free-<br />
dom is not a reality if the force to check institutions <strong>and</strong> powerful individuals is small. A<br />
rough survey of East Africa shows that the number of journalists in Kenya are 1,500-<br />
2,000, 123 in Tanzania 2,000, 124 <strong>and</strong> in Ug<strong>and</strong>a 400. 125 In other words, there are about<br />
20,000 inhabitants per each journalist. 126 In practice, even if East African journalists had<br />
extensive freedom they would not have capacity to perform critical journalism in a broad<br />
manner.<br />
Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa<br />
In East Africa, the growth of press freedom can be analysed in four ways. First is the role<br />
of the press. Second is news gathering. Third is publishing. Fourth is protection of<br />
journalistic activities.<br />
Role of the <strong>Press</strong><br />
All the East African countries ensure more or less unreserved freedom of expression in<br />
their constitutions, 127 <strong>and</strong> at the same time have many laws regulating press freedom.<br />
Typical limitations are framed in laws on defamations or libels, sedition, penal codes,<br />
national security acts as well as acts on newspapers, broadcasting <strong>and</strong> films. 128 Altogether<br />
122<br />
Calculated on figures from: Aronson, “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet recolution”, pp. 544-546.<br />
123<br />
Estimate made by Joseph Olweny, Editorial Manager at Nation Media Group Ltd., in conference in his<br />
office in Nation Centre in Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />
124<br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. iii.<br />
125<br />
Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. vi.<br />
126<br />
Number of inhabitants from: Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000, CD-rom.<br />
127<br />
Kenya: Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 101-104, Tanzania: Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.),<br />
A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 1, Ug<strong>and</strong>a: Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the<br />
Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. 4.<br />
128<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-190 <strong>and</strong> 272-273; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A<br />
h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 1-9.<br />
98
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
these make up a web of strings to authorities, <strong>and</strong> any powerful individual, to interfere with<br />
the press’ conduct. In this way East Africa has a conditional press freedom. 129<br />
Laws protecting national interests are common in all democracies. But such laws in<br />
East Africa are extensive. One example is Tanzania’s Prisons Act of 1967 which bans jour-<br />
nalists to visit prisons, talk with prisoners, take photos, or for ex-prisoners to share their<br />
experience with journalists. 130 In that way Tanzania’s government removed a significant<br />
part of legal protection from public debate.<br />
Media is business based on incomes from markets. A major problem for East<br />
African media is small <strong>and</strong> poor markets due to poverty. Therefore it is difficult for<br />
African media to achieve economic growth <strong>and</strong> a sustainable economy which are supposed<br />
to support their independence. 131 Despite many attempts to start newspapers, bankruptcy is<br />
common. 132 Scanty advertising markets make governments advertising to be a major actor<br />
resulting in dependence. 133 One exception in East Africa is, however the Nation Media<br />
Group, based in Nairobi that runs commercial media business in all these three countries.<br />
In 2003 the group had a total sale of almost US$ 60 million where the profit before tax<br />
reached 20% of the sale. 134 There are some complaints on taxes, among these being the<br />
broadcast licence fees in Ug<strong>and</strong>a. 135 Tanzania’s waiver of some taxes against media is an<br />
unusual example in East Africa of public subsidies to support media. 136<br />
The media ensure their role by creating self-regulating bodies such as The Media<br />
Council of Kenya whose purpose is to keep government out of media operations. 137 In<br />
129<br />
Ogbondah, “Media Laws in Political Transition”, pp. 63-64 <strong>and</strong> 67.<br />
130<br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 7.<br />
131<br />
Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, pp. 225-226.<br />
132<br />
Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 18.<br />
133<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 168-170.<br />
134<br />
Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003, p. 22.<br />
135<br />
Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”.<br />
136<br />
Oral interview with Makunga.<br />
137 nd<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya : 2 Edition<br />
(Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya, 2004 [2002]), p. iii.<br />
99
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
1992 Kenya opened up to multi party political system accompanied by expansion of press<br />
freedom. Some politicians asked for regulations of media. As a reaction, The Media<br />
Industry Steering Committee (MISC) started to advocate self-regulation in the form of<br />
code of conduct <strong>and</strong> a media council. The Media Council of Kenya became operative in<br />
2004. The very first case came from the Minister of Information, Raphael Tuju versus<br />
Daily Nation. 138<br />
Stakeholders in MISC which runs the Media Council are The Kenya Union of<br />
Journalists, The Media Owners Association, Editors’ Guild of Kenya, The Alternative<br />
<strong>Press</strong>, Media Training Institutions, Kenya Correspondents’ Association, Media NGOs <strong>and</strong><br />
Public Media. 139 When a complaint is brought up, the procedure is first to try <strong>and</strong> mediate<br />
the dispute. If mediation does not work, the Media Council acts as a court. If dissatisfied,<br />
the complainant can bring the case before an ordinary court. The establishment of the<br />
Media Council is an attempt to enlarge the space for press freedom. 140<br />
Gathering Information<br />
The NWICO debate noted the lack of technology in poor countries <strong>and</strong> that the media in<br />
these countries are not properly equipped to access <strong>and</strong> gather information. In East Africa,<br />
lack of equipment is a bottleneck for access to information. 141<br />
The ethical side of information gathering is described in the Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong><br />
Practice of Journalism in Kenya. The code points out that comments from anyone who is<br />
mentioned in an unfavourable context should be obtained <strong>and</strong> that it is a professional<br />
obligation to protect confidential sources. Journalists should generally identify themselves,<br />
<strong>and</strong> not tape or record anyone without the person’s knowledge. In cases involving grief or<br />
138<br />
Oral interview with Esther Kamweru, Executive Director of The Media Council of Kenya, in her office in<br />
Nairobi, 10 th March, 2005, about the Media Council.<br />
139<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, p. iv.<br />
140<br />
Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />
141<br />
UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, pp. 73-74 <strong>and</strong> 77-81.<br />
100
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
shock, journalists should behave with sensitivity <strong>and</strong> discretion. Media should generally<br />
avoid paying for information, unless public interest is involved. Financial information<br />
received in advance should not be used for own benefit, or be passed to others. As sources<br />
children have special protections. They should not be interviewed in the absence of a<br />
parent or other responsible adult, <strong>and</strong> not be approached or photographed at school without<br />
the permission of school authorities. 142 Concerning election coverage, there is a warning<br />
that media workers would be exposed to corrupt <strong>and</strong> manipulative sources <strong>and</strong> that media<br />
houses should provide journalists with adequate resources to cover elections. Journalists<br />
should resist gifts or favours from interested parties as this could compromise their<br />
impartiality. In addition, it is emphasised that journalists have a special responsibility to<br />
investigate electoral malpractices. 143<br />
Without free access to information, freedom of expression is like a vehicle without<br />
fuel. In East Africa, information <strong>and</strong> documents in public administration are not freely<br />
accessible. A journalist cannot invoke many legal rights to support a claim for information.<br />
As a result the practice of secrecy in East Africa creates informal business among officials<br />
where they leak to journalists for bribes. 144<br />
An example of how unauthorised information gathering is prevented is the<br />
Tanzanian Films <strong>and</strong> Stage Plays Act. Under this act it is illegal to use video camera for<br />
any purposes, even for private entertainment, any place in Tanzania without a ministerial<br />
permission. 145 In Kenya the practice is freer despite a similar law. 146<br />
142<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, articles 1, 5, 6, 8,<br />
12, 14, 16 <strong>and</strong> 17.<br />
143<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage (Nairobi: The Media Council of<br />
Kenya, 2002), articles 11, 13 <strong>and</strong> 14 as well as pp. 4 <strong>and</strong> 10.<br />
144<br />
Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 12; <strong>and</strong> Ogbondah, “Media Laws<br />
in Political Transition”, p. 59.<br />
145<br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 7, confirmed in oral<br />
interview with Makunga.<br />
146<br />
Barth, Kodi, “The laws needed for those with cameras” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
Ltd.), commentary, 6 th March, 2005.<br />
101
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
In practice, it should not be impossible for capable journalists to get the information<br />
they really want. 147 In Tanzania practice depends on the actual medium’s attitude to<br />
government. Friendly journalists are treated with an extraordinary service including trans-<br />
port to ministers’ activities. ‘Enemies’ get nothing but a barrier. 148 In a society with poor<br />
markets <strong>and</strong> poor journalists, such practice make media vulnerable to corruption. 149<br />
In Kenya, the mainstream press are lobbying for a <strong>Freedom</strong> of Information Act<br />
which would turn the present principle of secrets upside down. 150 The Official Secrets Act<br />
says that it is an offence for any government official to communicate any information that<br />
he has obtained owing to his position to any person he is not authorised to communicate it<br />
to. 151 The Kenyan press wants, in principle, that everything is open information. From the<br />
lobbying part it is claimed that the Official Secrets Act contradicts democratic rights in the<br />
Constitution. A democratic society should allow free flow of information to increase the<br />
level of democracy, they have argued. In their opinion ‘secrets’ are ‘interests’. The press is<br />
capable of getting information despite the law. However, the journalists have to trust<br />
officials <strong>and</strong> treat them as confidential sources. But a problem is that officials have<br />
interests too, so such information is not always reliable. The areas of military <strong>and</strong> police<br />
are most secret, <strong>and</strong> it is argued that these areas also are where there is most corruption.<br />
The previous Kenyan government refused any open information policy. The recent<br />
government gives mixed signals, however, positive enough to be interpreted optimistically<br />
by the press. 152<br />
147<br />
Oral interview with Onyango-Obbo.<br />
148<br />
Oral interview with Makunga.<br />
149<br />
Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 249.<br />
150<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 159-160.<br />
151<br />
Ibid., pp. 115-116.<br />
152<br />
Oral interview with Muriithi Muriuki, Political Reporter at Daily Nation/Sunday Nation in Kenya, e-mail:<br />
fmuriithi@nation.co.ke. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi, 7 th March, 2005, about freedom<br />
of accessing information.<br />
102
Publishing<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Publishing transforms information into a force in society. Democratic values in conflict<br />
with publishing may be divided into categories as national <strong>and</strong> collective interests as well<br />
as private <strong>and</strong> individual interests. Each interest may have both legal <strong>and</strong> ethical aspects.<br />
National interests can be expressed in national security acts. The Tanzanian one, for<br />
instance, is modelled on a British act made in 1911. The act says that it is an offence to<br />
obtain, collect, record, publish or communicate to any person or any code, or password,<br />
article or information which might be or intended to be useful to a foreign power or<br />
disaffected person. The punishment of offence can be life imprisonment. Such conditions<br />
leave little space for press freedom. 153 Criminal laws that seek to protect the honour of the<br />
President or other state institutions <strong>and</strong> officials, is often wrapped up into laws on seditious<br />
libel. 154 The current Kenyan law on sedition has its origin in the colonial era whose<br />
purpose was to deny blacks freedom of expression. The law is still valid in Kenya but the<br />
practice has been lightened. 155<br />
Broadcasting media have superior positions in East Africa but airwaves are easy to<br />
control. Therefore, radio <strong>and</strong> TV, more than print media, have been controlled by<br />
governments in East Africa. 156 Despite liberalising, a firm grip is still maintained. For<br />
instance, in 2004 Ug<strong>and</strong>a temporarily closed down 33 FM stations. The dispute was about<br />
broadcasting fees, but all these radio stations represented alternative voices including<br />
foreign programmes. 157 Commercial radio may survive better that non-profit operators. But<br />
commercial radios are concentrated in urban areas where they have markets. Therefore,<br />
153<br />
Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 3-4.<br />
154<br />
Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, p. 198.<br />
155<br />
Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 272-274.<br />
156<br />
Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 1, 7-8 <strong>and</strong> 33-39.<br />
157 Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”<br />
103
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
rural people benefit less from this plurality. 158 That is also the case in Ug<strong>and</strong>a where<br />
community <strong>and</strong> non-commercial radios were most vulnerable to the boradcasting fees. 159<br />
Limitations on publishing due to national interests are common worldwide. The<br />
East African level is considered to be more restricted than in Western countries, but not<br />
very different from other poor countries. 160 Collective interests are typically formulated as<br />
public peace, hate speech as well as protecting morality <strong>and</strong> religion. 161 For instance,<br />
Kenya is more conservative than Ug<strong>and</strong>a in exposing body <strong>and</strong> sex, which makes a<br />
distinction in practice of publishing in the two countries. 162 Another collective value is<br />
democracy in itself. That is the reason for media to allow all parts to contribute in the<br />
public debate. The practice of this principle can be discussed. However, Kenyan media<br />
emphasise such an ideal in the very beginning of the Kenyan Code of Conduct of<br />
Journalism. 163<br />
Private interests may include both private institutions <strong>and</strong> individuals. There is<br />
danger of mixing private <strong>and</strong> national interests when the elite of political leaders <strong>and</strong><br />
business peoples are the same ones. 164 In East Africa, liberalisation of broadcasting has<br />
increased number of licenses. Yet, these radio <strong>and</strong> TV channels are concentrated in a few<br />
political h<strong>and</strong>s. 165 Another example is when the radio station Kiss FM in programs in April<br />
2004 used rough words about some Kenyan ministers as individuals. The ministers wanted<br />
to use government instruments as withdrawing of the licence to stop the radio station. 166<br />
158<br />
Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 6.<br />
159<br />
Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”<br />
160<br />
Walden, Ruth, “Insult Laws” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 212 <strong>and</strong> 220-222.<br />
161<br />
Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 200-201.<br />
162<br />
Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ug<strong>and</strong>ans like dirty pictures, so why faint at the V-word?” in The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 28th February, 2005.<br />
163<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, p. 2.<br />
164<br />
An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, pp. 22-24.<br />
165<br />
Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, pp. 120-122.<br />
166<br />
Daily Nation, “They want to kill Kiss FM, says Kalonzo” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />
news article, 20 th April, 2004; <strong>and</strong> Shikwati, James, “It’s a potential threat to <strong>Press</strong> freedom” in Daily Nation<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 22 nd April, 2004.<br />
104
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
The case of Kiss FM became hot due to underlying conflicts. Kiss FM’s owner Patrick<br />
Quarcoo has some connections with former President Moi <strong>and</strong> Kiss FM is adversarial to<br />
the present government. In addition, Quarcoo is a rival to Macharia, owner of Royal Media<br />
with Citizen’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV. Citizen FM even jammed Kiss FM’s broadcasting signals for<br />
a while without any subsequent consequences. 167 Just before this situation, Kiss FM also<br />
had poached <strong>and</strong> headhunted five of Citizen FM’s prime time presenters. 168 The Kiss FM<br />
example illustrates how a mix of interests influence publishing <strong>and</strong> reactions to it.<br />
A barrier between editorial matters <strong>and</strong> the interests of the medium’s owner is not<br />
developed much in East Africa. 169 The press history reports a great number of incidents<br />
where media owners have used their power to pursue private interests through editorial<br />
content. This is a source of censorship in Kenyan media, <strong>and</strong> illustrates the mix of private,<br />
commercial <strong>and</strong> political interests. 170<br />
Insult regulations are in a democracy meant to be the arrangement which make<br />
balance between rights of privacy towards other rights including freedom of expression.<br />
These laws are extensive in East Africa, <strong>and</strong> are useful for anyone who obstructs what<br />
media are publishing. 171 It is even possible for individuals to bring bankrupcty on a<br />
medium by libel law. 172 The Media Council of Kenya tries to turn this practice in a more<br />
favourable direction for press freedom. The attempt is to maintain balance between free-<br />
dom of expression <strong>and</strong> the right of privacy by use of code of ethics instead of the law. 173<br />
Reporting on tragedies <strong>and</strong> crime, the practice of East African newspapers is to<br />
publish details <strong>and</strong> identifying informations. Here are two examples:<br />
167 Oral interview with Opanga.<br />
168 Wachira, “The unlikely media mogul”.<br />
169 Retief, Media Ethics, pp. 141 <strong>and</strong> 144-146; <strong>and</strong> “Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>” above.<br />
170 For instance: Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, pp. 83-85 <strong>and</strong> 99, Ochieng, I<br />
Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 55 <strong>and</strong> 63 (where Ochieng disagree with Kadhi); <strong>and</strong> Kadhi’s address “Is There a<br />
Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” in Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />
171 Walden, “Insult Laws”, pp. 208-212 <strong>and</strong> 220-222. This general article also refers to Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
172 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 227.<br />
173 The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, pp. i-ii.<br />
105
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
“TRAGEDY: Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother 174<br />
A 10-year-old boy killed himself after quarrelling with his mother over a<br />
lost textbook in Gatuanyaga village, Thika District. Police suspect Kelvin<br />
Muiruri Mburu wanted to escape his mother’s wrath. She is said to have<br />
threatened dire consequences if the mathematics book was not found.<br />
Central police spokesperson Dorothy Kavita said Ms Elizabeth Wangui had<br />
learnt of the book’s loss when a neighbour’s daughter stopped by to borrow<br />
it. […] the boy was found with a rope round his neck hanging from the grills<br />
of his bedroom window. […] ”<br />
“Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal 175<br />
[…] the police yesterday rescued a four-year-old girl who had been denied<br />
treatment after a rape ordeal by her uncle at a remote Kilifi village. The girl<br />
was left to nurse her wounds after the incident last Friday after her family<br />
declined to report the matter, fearing a curse by the girl’s gr<strong>and</strong>father believed<br />
to be a wizard. […] repeatedly raped by her uncle […] The girl was too<br />
traumatised to speak about her ordeal. […] the minor’s gr<strong>and</strong>mother, Elisabeth<br />
Muruu […] It is believed that several girls in the area have been defiled<br />
by their relatives […] When the girl was finally brought, she could not st<strong>and</strong><br />
the sight of many people <strong>and</strong> immediately took to her heels. Her mother<br />
Mejumaa Bakari said she had caught the man red h<strong>and</strong>ed defiling her<br />
daughter. […] was shocked to find her daughter naked with the man lying<br />
on top of her. She said her brother-in-law left without uttering a word. On<br />
inspecting her daughter’s clothes she found out they had been soiled.[…] ”<br />
The first example shows the press covering single incidents of suicide. Even if it is a child<br />
who committed suicide, details of the act <strong>and</strong> possible motives are described. The article<br />
includes name of the victim who committed suicide, name of the mother who is both a<br />
victim <strong>and</strong> pointed out as ‘guilty’ as well as details about the course of events. The second<br />
example illustrates how the four year old girl is identified indirectly by use of the mother’s<br />
<strong>and</strong> gr<strong>and</strong>mother’s names <strong>and</strong> location. The uncle is identified in the same way. Some<br />
details about the abuse are revealed to the public too.<br />
‘Privileged information’ explains why some Kenyan cases are covered freely when<br />
others are tied up with anonymity, hidden points <strong>and</strong> modest descriptions – if these are<br />
covered at all. The different publishing practices in different cases reflect areas which are<br />
or are not included in the parliamentary immunity. In Kenya that includes parliamentary<br />
174<br />
Daily Nation, “Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />
Group), news article, 27 th January, 2005.<br />
175<br />
Mudi, Maureen, “Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
Ltd.), news article, 15 th January, 2005.<br />
106
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
committees <strong>and</strong> hearings as well as courts. The practice is that media are free to refer to<br />
what is said at these places <strong>and</strong> can cover cases almost without limits. Aspects which are<br />
not covered in these places, or other cases, are subjected to strong regulations of libels <strong>and</strong><br />
so on. The result is a dual practice of news publishing. 176<br />
’National security’ is often a reason for interfering with publishing. The Ug<strong>and</strong>an<br />
newspaper The Monitor reported in October 2002 about a helicopter which crashed in<br />
action against rebels in North. In this area, a civil war with the Lord Resistance Army<br />
(LRA) is going on. The two decade old conflict is described by United Nations as “among<br />
the worst humanitarian disasters in the world” having produced more than 1.5 million<br />
internally displaced people. 177 The Ug<strong>and</strong>an government claimed that the article was likely<br />
to endanger national security. The Monitor was raided by security personnel <strong>and</strong> closed<br />
down for 10 days. One <strong>and</strong> a half years later, the Ug<strong>and</strong>an Supreme Court ruled that there<br />
was no evidence to show that the helicopter report prejudiced national security. 178 Yet, the<br />
government achieved its objective to intimidate the involved journalists <strong>and</strong> editors for a<br />
while. The Monitor’s management suspect the action against the helicopter article to be a<br />
result of critical reports in the newspaper which had been harsh to the government. 179<br />
Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />
Traditionally, it is the authorities’ treatment of journalists <strong>and</strong> journalistic activities which<br />
have been the issue in dispute. Reported harassments targeting journalists in East Africa<br />
stretch from arresting, imprisoning, questionning, charging <strong>and</strong> stripping of citizenship,<br />
suing, expelling from certain places as well as closing radio stations <strong>and</strong> banning sources<br />
176 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 156-165.<br />
177 <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, Northern Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Underst<strong>and</strong>ing <strong>and</strong> solving the conflict, an <strong>International</strong><br />
Crisis Group Report (Nairobi/Brussels: <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, 2004), ICG Africa Report Number 77,<br />
14 th April, 2004, pp. 1-2.<br />
178 Abdallah, Halima, “ ‘Monitor’ journalists win case over chopper report” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), news article, 1 st April, 2004; <strong>and</strong> Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ung<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free,<br />
So Terrorised” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />
179 Oral interview with Onyango-Obbo.<br />
107
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
from seeing journalists. 180 The course in Ug<strong>and</strong>a illustrates an exercise in political control<br />
where journalists are jailed or brought before courts 10 times more than during the regimes<br />
of Obote <strong>and</strong> Amin before 1986. 181<br />
There are indications of improvements in free practice of journalism. For instance,<br />
in 2003 a delegate at Kenya’s National Constitutional Review Conference, Dr. Crispin O.<br />
Mbai, was killed. The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard brought the story “Mbai killers confess” 28 th<br />
September, 2003. The newspaper’s Managing Editor, David Makali, together with a police<br />
officer, were arrested <strong>and</strong> charged with theft of a copy of a videocassette which the article<br />
was supposed to be based on. 182 When the court made its judgement in 2005, a premise<br />
was that the real interest of the State had nothing to do with a theft of a cassette worth<br />
Kenyan shillings 500 which is equal to between six <strong>and</strong> seven American dollars. The<br />
State’s interest was to maintain a monopoly to release or withhold information. However,<br />
the defendants were found not guilty. It became the first time for a Kenyan court to regard<br />
constitutional press freedom <strong>and</strong> public’s right to know to be superior to interests of the<br />
State. 183<br />
The behaviour of private persons towards media does not follow a certain pattern.<br />
The powerful ones have wide ranging possibilities. For instance in use of libel laws to<br />
influence journalists. Another indication of private individual’s practice is the code of<br />
conduct which warns against manipulative sources that may use bribes or gifts. 184 Incidents<br />
180<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 27-28, 48 <strong>and</strong> 50.<br />
181<br />
Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free, So Terrorised” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />
182<br />
Kadida, Jillo, “Editor <strong>and</strong> CID officer on theft charge” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />
news article, 2 nd October, 2003.<br />
183 th<br />
Mungai, Kibe, “Balanced justice” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 10<br />
April, 2005.<br />
184<br />
The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage, p. 4.<br />
108
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
where the presence of journalists became controversial, resulting in attempts to lynch, have<br />
been reported. 185<br />
The editorial departments in media houses in East Africa are not protected from<br />
interference by its owners. The owners can influence editorial matters <strong>and</strong> single articles. If<br />
a journalist objects, he or she is vulnerable because of the high unemployment. The lucky<br />
ones who got a journalist’s job will not jeopardise it. To get fired means unemployment.<br />
To be safe, journalists do not challenge the bosses or owners. 186 Although the Nation<br />
Media Group has a declared policy that the editor has complete editorial control, that has<br />
not prevented editors from being dismissed when Muslim fellows of the dominant owner<br />
Aga Khan have been offended. 187<br />
“Mr Moneybags” is a case study in this aspect. It is a conflict between the press<br />
versus Kenyan cabinet ministers <strong>and</strong> other powerful individuals concerning use of criminal<br />
libel. It started when The St<strong>and</strong>ard used four pages on a story called “Mr Moneybags”. It<br />
detailed how an economic elite controls politics <strong>and</strong> the economy. Many prominent people<br />
were mentioned. 188 The reactions were strong from people indirectly accused of corrupt<br />
behaviour which they rejected. The writer, Kamau Ngotho, was charged with publishing<br />
defamatory matter contrary to the Kenyan Penal Code. Even an Associate Editor of the<br />
same newspaper was questioned by the Criminal Investigations Department. 189 It was the<br />
press’ turn to raise voices, supported by foreign donors <strong>and</strong> NGOs concerned with press<br />
freedom <strong>and</strong> human rights. In an editorial Daily Nation wrote:<br />
“It is shameful that Kenya under Narc still retains such repressive laws as<br />
criminal defamation, publishing false information <strong>and</strong> the ridiculous<br />
185<br />
For instance: Daily Nation, “ ‘Nation’ writer’s ordeal at GSU officer’s home” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 24 th February, 2005.<br />
186<br />
Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 123.<br />
187<br />
Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 60-61; <strong>and</strong> Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 13.<br />
188<br />
Ngotho, Kamau, “Mr Moneybags : EXCLUSIVE: In Kenya, politics <strong>and</strong> high finance are two sides of the<br />
same coin. And the game is played by the same people” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />
news article, 8 th January, 2005.<br />
189<br />
Murimi, Joseph, “ ‘St<strong>and</strong>ard’ writer faces libel charge” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />
news article, 14 th January, 2005.<br />
109
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
colonial offence of publishing an alarming statement. They are primitive<br />
laws […] It’s trying to intimidate the <strong>Press</strong> into not covering growing rot in<br />
government.” 190<br />
Eight foreign missions in Nairobi, including the United States <strong>and</strong> all the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />
countries, followed up in a statement:<br />
“[…] use of criminal law is out of step with international practice. […] The<br />
criminal investigation department’s detention, upon orders of National Security<br />
Minister Murungaru, further heightens our concern. We would have<br />
expected that the police <strong>and</strong> the Ministry of Justice pursuit of accountability<br />
for corrupt activities would encourage investigations of those responsible,<br />
not seek to muzzle those who ask questions. […] must be aware that the use<br />
of criminal libel laws for political intimidation undercuts a vital pillar of<br />
society critical to the further development of democratic governance.” 191<br />
There was an ongoing conflict where the press <strong>and</strong> foreign missions frequently<br />
criticised NARC’s government of growing corruption within its own ranks. This conflict<br />
erupted after The St<strong>and</strong>ard’s article. After two weeks the Kenyan Attorney General<br />
dropped the case. He described the criminal libel law as archaic <strong>and</strong> advised the public to<br />
file civil suits for defamation rather than turn to the police. 192 In this case a Cabinet<br />
Minister’s attack against the press led to a massive pressure from the press assisted by<br />
foreign missions <strong>and</strong> civil society. The final result was even a step in direction of enlarged<br />
press freedom. However, a commentary after the case described how the Attorney<br />
General’s dismissing not was a victory for press freedom because it was only words, <strong>and</strong><br />
not a legally binding judgement. It would be better for press freedom if the case had come<br />
to court <strong>and</strong> the actual section of the Penal Code had been found unconstitutional, the<br />
commentary stated. The actual law is still Kenyan law – in the books. 193<br />
190 th<br />
Daily Nation, “Narc won’t cow the press” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), editorial, 13<br />
January, 2005.<br />
191<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard Team, “Outrage by donors over press harassment” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />
news article, 13 th January, 2005.<br />
192<br />
Kago, Tony <strong>and</strong> Kadida, Jillo, “State drops libel case : Outdated law will never be used again, says Wako”<br />
in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 21 st January, 2005.<br />
193<br />
Mwaura, Peter, “Criminal libel: AG missed the real issue” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />
Group), commentary, 22 nd January, 2005.<br />
110
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Chapter 5: Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa Compared<br />
The regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa illustrate different practices of press freedom.<br />
The two regions have similarities <strong>and</strong> differences <strong>and</strong> still they interact.<br />
Contexts <strong>and</strong> Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Among the similarities between the regions, is that each has some kind of press freedom.<br />
In both places, newspapers have spearheaded development of press freedom. Broadcasting<br />
has been more controlled, by regulations or as public broadcasters. Some liberalisation of<br />
the airwaves has taken place in all countries. In both regions, numerous organisations have<br />
emerged to advocate different interests, <strong>and</strong> these have big capacities in lobbying <strong>and</strong><br />
international networking. Self censorship exists at different levels in both regions, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
influence of global media is felt in both regions.<br />
There are also differences. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia’s democratisation processes started almost<br />
200 years earlier than that in East Africa <strong>and</strong> the levels of press freedom are different. In<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, the media’s role as a democratic actor is highly recognised at all levels of<br />
government. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, in particular Sweden, is the place of origin of codes of conduct<br />
<strong>and</strong> self-regulating systems within the press. Norway is the first place where the whole<br />
industry committed itself to regard the editor as the guarantor for editorial independence<br />
towards owners as well as other departments of the company. These Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />
arrangements have subsequently become universal models. The level <strong>and</strong> capacity of<br />
media education have grown properly in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />
East Africa, with its colonial history, still has laws constructed by colonial masters.<br />
Such laws have survived because these are useful tools for the ruling elite to control the<br />
media. However, East Africa is going through changes that increase press freedom.<br />
111
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Another feature of growth of press freedom where East Africa is different from<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, is in the role of magazines <strong>and</strong> alternative press outside mainstream media. In<br />
East Africa these alternative media were key actors in challenging the limits to press<br />
freedom. They helped to exp<strong>and</strong> the scope <strong>and</strong> the level of press freedom in all East<br />
African countries.<br />
Reasons for <strong>and</strong> Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Both regions have adopted a common philosophical basis for press freedom. These are the<br />
search for truth, democracy, <strong>and</strong> support for individual liberty in a society. In practice, both<br />
regions object to interference from government in media operations.<br />
There are some differences. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, the editor’s judgement in all editorial<br />
matters is independent. In East Africa, editors are to a great degree affected by foreign<br />
owners <strong>and</strong> foreign commercial actors. Due to weak domestic markets, foreign media<br />
owners’ abuse their power <strong>and</strong> are a great threat to media in poor countries. 1 Another<br />
major issue in East Africa is how the elite influence <strong>and</strong> hamper media’s freedom. Finally,<br />
competing interests in East Africa use media to support their ‘development agenda’ which<br />
are not necessarily synonymous with press freedom.<br />
Mass Media in the Societies<br />
Despite different capacity, media have an important role all in these societies. These<br />
figures are calculations based on the surveys of each region in previous chapters.<br />
Number of radio <strong>and</strong> TV receivers per 1000 inhabitants (1996)<br />
Average per country TV Radio<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 525 998<br />
East Africa 15 173<br />
Proportion (Sc : EA) 35 : 1 6 : 1<br />
1 Okonkwo, “Journalists in a Developing Economy”, pp. 6-9.<br />
112
Spread of daily newspapers (1996)<br />
Average per country Number of<br />
titles<br />
Total<br />
circulation<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Circulation per<br />
1000 inhabitants<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 71 2,900,000 449<br />
East Africa 3 141,000 5<br />
Proportion (Sc : EA) 24 : 1 21 : 1 87 : 1<br />
Number of new published book titles (1996)<br />
Average per country New book titles Titles per<br />
1000 inhabitants<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 10,916 1.8<br />
East Africa 253 0.009<br />
Proportion (Sc : EA) 43 : 1 196 : 1<br />
Journalistic capacity<br />
Average per country Number of<br />
journalists<br />
Inhabitants per<br />
journalist<br />
Jour. per 1000<br />
inhabitants<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 11,333 548 1.82<br />
East Africa 1,383 19,545 0.05<br />
Proportion (Sc : EA) 8 : 1 1 : 36 36 : 1<br />
Access to internet <strong>and</strong> telecommunication media in East Africa is very low while it<br />
is high in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. In 2000, access of internet in Africa was estimated at 1 of 1500<br />
persons. The worldwide average was 1 of 38, <strong>and</strong> in the West it was 1 of 4. 2 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />
countries are even ranked at the top within the group of among Western countries. 3<br />
From all angles, the figures confirm one of the major issues in the NWICO debate,<br />
the great difference in means of mass communications in the North compared to the South.<br />
Further, the figures indicate how the differences are higest in elite oriented media, in<br />
particular books <strong>and</strong> daily circulation of newspapers. The differences are least in spread of<br />
radio. East Africa, as other poor regions, is poorly equipped compared to rich countries.<br />
2 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 220.<br />
3 UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 270.<br />
113
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
There is also the questions of the capacity of a free press. East Africa has less<br />
capacity than Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The ‘journalistic capacity’ indicates how strong media are able<br />
to play their role as watchdog. Even if the level of press freedom was similar in the two<br />
regions, it would be different in practice. Each journalist in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia caters for about<br />
500 people, in East Africa each journalist caters for about 20,000 people. This makes the<br />
abilities to fulfil media’s social responsibility different.<br />
The Aspect of the <strong>Press</strong>’ Role<br />
Similarities of the role of the press in these countries are to be found in the constitutions,<br />
they all guarantee freedom of expression although the practice is different. Countries in<br />
both regions regard media self-regulation as a way of maintaining independence. In this,<br />
the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavinans are ahead of the East Africans.<br />
Countries in both regions have a number of laws whose purposes are different.<br />
Regulations in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ensure diversity or other democratic values. Similar reasons are<br />
used for some arrangements of financial incentives to the press in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. In East<br />
Africa such practice has recently emerged in Tanzania where some taxes on media have<br />
been waived. Other financial incentives to media in East Africa have been given due to<br />
rulers’ propag<strong>and</strong>a aims or national ownership. In all countries in these regions, public<br />
funded state owned broadcasters have had a prominent role. A major problem for East<br />
African media is poor markets due to poverty. Welfare <strong>and</strong> good markets can provide<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media with a quite different level of income. These resources are employed<br />
in an extensive journalistic capacity. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media’s resources <strong>and</strong> position make<br />
them powerful in advocating their own interests in the society.<br />
114
The Aspect of Gathering Information<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Similarities are few in information gathering between the two regions. The major similarity<br />
is probably what codes of conduct advise on relations to sources. Ethical issues such as<br />
independence, fairness, securing sources, <strong>and</strong> modesty in some situations in particular with<br />
regard to children, are similiar. These common features illustrate how codes of conduct in<br />
these regions have similar roots.<br />
The differences are most clear when it comes to information from public admini-<br />
strations. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the principle is openness with some exceptions. In East Africa the<br />
principle is secrets with some exceptions. The outlet in East Africa is a journalistic practice<br />
which nevertheless may provide a lot of information into the public sphere. Due to this<br />
‘hidden game’ much of this information is controlled or coloured by actors with vested<br />
interests. Another major difference is in the tools available for information gathering. Due<br />
to widespread access to internet in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> a huge amount of relevant information<br />
to dig up, the journalists there are far ahead of their colleagues in East Africa.<br />
The Aspect of Publishing<br />
Similarities seem to be evident because media in the two regions look similar. Commercial<br />
forces work in the same way. The same methods are used in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
to attract audiences. Further, codes of conduct are guided by the same philosophy. That<br />
philosophy also explains why media practitioners in these regions share preferences in<br />
publishing policy.<br />
Differences are clear in balancing between laws <strong>and</strong> ethics. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the laws<br />
are not very restrective. Decisive factors in publishing are the medium’s own policy<br />
together with the national code of conduct. In East Africa the laws usually impose a<br />
restrective framework. Culture is a determinant factor for ethics. Taste, shame, respect,<br />
fear <strong>and</strong> faith, for instance, are interpreted differently in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian cultures compared to<br />
115
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
cultures in East Africa. Such values guide selection <strong>and</strong> approaches to content. Such<br />
cultural values explain differences in publishing practices. Further, East African practice is<br />
influenced by British traditions which are different from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in these matters. 4<br />
Concerning reports on crimes, Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media ethics tend to support a Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />
criminal policy that is more concerned with rehabilitation than with punishment. 5<br />
The Aspect of Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />
Similarities in the two regions are most clear in declared media ethics. These concern<br />
protection <strong>and</strong> independence towards authorities, external commercial forces, owners <strong>and</strong><br />
other private actors. The ideals within the press are similar in the two regions.<br />
Differences are large when it comes to the practice in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.<br />
A journalist in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia risks some harsh words. That is nothing compared to<br />
colleagues in East Africa who risk harassment <strong>and</strong> danger, even though the possible<br />
assassination of journalists has subsided. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, courts have expressed views that<br />
journalists should enjoy extraordinary protection, just the way it is for government officials<br />
on duty. The reason is that the media perform an important function in society. Such kind<br />
of notion has started to emerge in East Africa when an editor in 2005 was found not guilty<br />
of theft of a videocassette. The Kenyan court said the theft was not an issue when it<br />
considered the importance of the revealed information for the society as being more<br />
important than the State’s information monopoly. However, the everyday life for<br />
journalists in East Africa is different from that in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian model of<br />
barriers between owners <strong>and</strong> editorial departments is the ideal in East Africa, but it is not<br />
upheld as a principle.<br />
4 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, p. 74.<br />
5 Jones, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils, p. 31.<br />
116
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Interactions Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
Interactions between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa are conducted in several ways. There are<br />
direct links where press freedom is the matter. Further, both regions interact indirect<br />
because both are subordinated to the same global regimes of press freedom.<br />
Direct Links Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries do not have long traditions for activities in East Africa. From the<br />
time of independence, East African countries became recipients of development aid from<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries. These regional connections emerged despite lack of earlier<br />
connections. 6 The level of trade between the two regions is modest. Aid was given both as<br />
bilateral <strong>and</strong> multilateral assistance. In addition, support from private institutions as well as<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian governments through NGOs are common. 7 All the East African countries<br />
have been through periods where aid from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia more or less was cancelled. 8 On a<br />
personal level, the Tanzanian President Julius K. Nyerere developed strong bonds with the<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians. 9<br />
All Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries include media or press freedom as conditions for giving<br />
aid. This can be in policy declarations, as a part of ‘good governance’ conditionalities tied<br />
to aid, or as support to specific media projects. The following examples illustrate how<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian aid influence press freedom in East Africa. First, Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden, in<br />
Tanzania in 2004, sponsored the annual World Association of <strong>Press</strong> Councils Conference<br />
6 Simensen, Jarle, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden : Norsk utviklingshjelps historie 1 (Bergen,<br />
Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003), pp. 135-136 <strong>and</strong> 197.<br />
7 Ibid., pp. 135-170, 215 <strong>and</strong> 268.<br />
8 Ibid., pp. 182-183 (Ug<strong>and</strong>a); <strong>and</strong> Ruud, Arild Engelsen, 1975-1989: Vekst, velvilje og utfordringer : Norsk<br />
utviklingshjelps historie 2 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003), pp. 167-168 (Tanzania) <strong>and</strong> 257-258<br />
(Kenya).<br />
9 Simensen, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden, pp. 141-142.<br />
117
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
worth about US$ 50,000. 10 Second, Sweden supports training of journalists in Tanzania. 11<br />
Third, in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, Denmark <strong>and</strong> Norway together made survey of hindrances for local<br />
media to report on human rights, corruption <strong>and</strong> conflicts. 12 Fourth, Norway has come up<br />
with a media plan for Ug<strong>and</strong>a. This one includes proposals to establish a rural press club,<br />
a foundation for summoned journalists, developing of a diploma course in journalism, <strong>and</strong><br />
a campaign for a new media policy. 13 Fifth, in 2004 Norway resumed bilateral aid to<br />
Kenya, 13 years after Kenya cancelled it due to bad diplomatic relations. The Norwegian<br />
Agency for Development Cooperation (NORAD) started a process which probably would<br />
end up with a media plan for Kenya. 14 Sixth, Sweden sponsored community radios in all<br />
the East African countries, <strong>and</strong> supported a media NGO training journalists in focusing on<br />
needs of the poor. 15<br />
At the level of NGOs concerning media, individuals from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East<br />
Africa interact with each other. For example, in IPI both members from Norway <strong>and</strong> Swe-<br />
den as well as Kenya have had prominent positions. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have been<br />
well represented in the Board of Executives since its founding, 16 had the directorship, 17 <strong>and</strong><br />
hosted the General Assembly four times. 18 For Kenya, Tom Mboya became a key figure<br />
during the 1960s. He was invited as a prominent speaker to the General Assembly in Paris<br />
10 The Media Council of Tanzania, “Norwegian Embassy donates 24 m/- for WAPC conference” in Media<br />
Watch (Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), no. 56, Aug. 2004; <strong>and</strong> The Media Council<br />
of Tanzania, “Supporters of the WAPC conference in Bagamoyo” in Media Watch, no. 59, Nov. 2004.<br />
11 The Media Council of Tanzania, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting centre for training of journos” in Media<br />
Watch, no. 57, Sept. 2004.<br />
12 Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, internal memo, Norad, Oslo, Norway, 12 th October, 2004, archive<br />
reference 842.0.<br />
13 Ibid.<br />
14 Correspondance with Tone Bratteli, Senior Advisor, The Norwegian Agency for Development<br />
Cooperation, received e-mail 24 th January, 2005. E-mail: tone.bratteli@norad.no.<br />
15 Correspondance with Cecilia Bäckl<strong>and</strong>er, Diplomat at the Swedish Embassy in Nairobi, e-mail received<br />
11 th March, 2005. E-mail: cecilia@rosslyn.co.ke.<br />
16 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years, pp. 12-13, Coppard, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Freedom</strong>, p. 128; <strong>and</strong> The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000, pp. 8 amd 82.<br />
17 The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000, p. 29.<br />
18 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “IPI Congresses” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (Vienna: The<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), p. 49.<br />
118
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
in 1962, <strong>and</strong> was involved in IPI’s Nairobi training program for African journalists. 19<br />
Nairobi hosted the IPIs annual conference in 1981 <strong>and</strong> will do it again in 2005. 20 The 2005<br />
Chairman of IPI is Wilfred Kiboro, CEO of Nation Media Group. 21<br />
IPI is only one example of how international press freedom NGOs make up a<br />
network where individuals <strong>and</strong> institutions influence each other globally. In such a way,<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian <strong>and</strong> East African individuals, institutions <strong>and</strong> NGOs participate in this global<br />
web for the spread of press freedom.<br />
Relations to Global Regimes of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
<strong>International</strong> regimes contribute to press freedom both in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa, two<br />
regions which are minor actors in a global struggle for press freedom. All these countries<br />
are members of the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO. They are members of the same<br />
international regime on press freedom. Both regions are subordinated to the global<br />
influence of the United States on press freedom. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia has a lot of similarities to the<br />
United States because they are part of the common political philosophy <strong>and</strong> development<br />
in Western countries. Concerning self-regulation, Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia has spearheaded a<br />
development which was adopted by the United States. 22 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia maintains its role as<br />
global spearhead for media ethics <strong>and</strong> has had great impact on new democracies in Eastern<br />
Europe. 23 Both regions are subjected to the international press freedom regimes, but the<br />
difference is that East Africa has less influence in the policy formulation.<br />
19<br />
Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, p. 84.<br />
20<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “IPI Congresses” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna, p. 49.<br />
21 th<br />
The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>: “Executive Board”, http://www.freemedia.at/cvs.htm, downloaded 28<br />
March, 2005. IPI’s homepage: http://www.freemedia.at/<br />
22<br />
Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-69; <strong>and</strong> Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils,<br />
pp. 30-32.<br />
23<br />
Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, p. 235.<br />
119
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
While Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media have followed similar trends to those of other Western<br />
countries, 24 East Africa is new in media commercialisation. Conerning democracy, all East<br />
African countries have adopted liberal ideals including the principle of press freedom. But<br />
this has happened about 200 years later than in the West, which explains its moderate<br />
level.<br />
The conflicting issues on press freedom in East Africa today are similar to conflicts<br />
in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia decades or even a century before. One example is the freedom to access<br />
information which is an issue in East Africa. After years of struggle it was implemented by<br />
laws in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in 1970. 25 Another example is establishing of self-regulation which is<br />
happening in East Africa now. 26 That was a reality in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia around the 1920s. 27<br />
Both Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian <strong>and</strong> East African media <strong>and</strong> individuals are well connected to<br />
international NGOs concerned with press freedom. However, a difference is that East Afri-<br />
cans have client relations to these NGOs. A common pattern is that Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians are<br />
donors <strong>and</strong> East Africans are the recipients. 28 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians are involved in formulating of<br />
policy, East Africans are adopters of that policy. 29 In education there are similar patterns of<br />
universal st<strong>and</strong>ardisation. The difference is that East Africa plays the role of client. Aid<br />
from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian donors has funded schools of journalism in East Africa. 30 The concepts<br />
in the dicipline of journalism is developed in the West <strong>and</strong> exported to journalism schools<br />
in poor countries. 31 Concerning codes of conduct Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians have participated in<br />
24<br />
Dahlgren, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden”p. 251<br />
25<br />
Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 115.<br />
26<br />
Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />
27<br />
Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils, pp. 18-19, 28-29 <strong>and</strong> 30-32.<br />
28<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Fund” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna, p. 7; <strong>and</strong> oral<br />
interview with Kamweru.<br />
29<br />
One example: Coppard, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>, pp. 127-128 <strong>and</strong> 133.<br />
30<br />
Three examples: 1) Sweden in Tanzania: The Media Council of Tanzania, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting<br />
centre for training of journos” in Media Watch, Sept. 2004, 2) Norwegian <strong>and</strong> Danish survey conclusion in<br />
proposed support to education in Ug<strong>and</strong>a: Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, section 5, 3) Norway to the<br />
University of Nairobi: Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, p. 128.<br />
31<br />
In general: Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 213. One example about Norway in Ethiopia: Eikje, “God<br />
journalistikk er en vaktbikkje”.<br />
120
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
development of globally accepted principles. In East Africa a common opinion has been<br />
that it is not necessary to invent the wheel again. The Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of<br />
Journalism in Kenya was made after consultations with key players of press freedom in<br />
Engl<strong>and</strong>, Minnesota <strong>and</strong> Australia in addition to Tanzania. 32<br />
The United States interferes directly with press freedom affairs. One example is<br />
how such a dominant player even has selected individuals from East Africa who became<br />
prominent international representatives. For instance, it is claimed that Tom Mboya, who<br />
was an early authority about Kenyan press freedom, was brought up as an international<br />
political representative by the British <strong>and</strong> Americans. 33 Another example is how<br />
Americans connected with Ronald Reagan funded the Nairobi Law Monthly during Moi’s<br />
dictatorship to ensure one of the few critical voices against the regime. 34<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa are subordinated to forces conducting economic<br />
globalisation which include influence over press freedom regimes. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries<br />
are included in international regimes on press freedom. They have a prominent position to<br />
influence <strong>and</strong> formulate global press freedom as well as influence agents supporting global<br />
spread of press freedom. The East African states have been members of the international<br />
regimes on press freedom. The difference is East Africa’s subordinate client role, <strong>and</strong> level<br />
of press freedom which reflects a shorter period of democratic rule.<br />
32 Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />
33 Munene, Macharia: “The Colonial Policies of Segregating the Kikuyu, 1920 – 1964” in Chemchemi<br />
(Nairobi: Kenyatta University <strong>and</strong> Acacia Publishers), volume 2, 2002, number 1, p. 40.<br />
34 Munene, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual Warriors”, p. 8.<br />
121
Chapter 6: Conclusion<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
<strong>Press</strong> freedom is rarely openly rejected. However, different forces compete to bend press<br />
freedom to serve their interests. The democratic purpose of press freedom is to create<br />
transparency <strong>and</strong> participation through free flows of information which maximise social,<br />
political <strong>and</strong> cultural outcomes in a society. The thesis has examined the spread of press<br />
freedom in context of globalisation. North-South perspectives have appeared due to the<br />
attention to the regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.<br />
The objective, to provide underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom as a global concept, has<br />
employed four approaches. First, to establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of globalisation context.<br />
Second, to establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the concept of press freedom. Third, to describe <strong>and</strong><br />
compare practices of press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa. Fourth, to give a<br />
balanced description of press freedom in context of globalisation.<br />
First, globalisation interconnects peoples in the world to be more influenced by<br />
each other. Yet, economic globalisation has concentrated power into a few h<strong>and</strong>s which<br />
control a hegemony. These global economic interests create <strong>and</strong> benefit from a global<br />
audience which acts as like-minded consumers. The history of modern economic<br />
globalisation starts with colonial empires. After the Second World War the United States<br />
succeeded as the spearhead of globalisation. A world trade regime where American<br />
business people became masters was created. After the Cold War it became the worldwide<br />
order.<br />
<strong>Globalisation</strong> has a number of characteristic features. First is the hierarchy of states<br />
where the United States <strong>and</strong> a few others maintain a hegemony. Second, while some<br />
countries such as China, India, Malaysia as well as Mexico <strong>and</strong> Turkey benefit from<br />
increased global trade, countries in Africa have been further marginalised. Third, is the<br />
122
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
declined role of state governments as the powers of business <strong>and</strong> civil society have<br />
increased. Economic power has moved to a global level, political power has mainly<br />
remained at state level. Media are among those whose power has increased.<br />
Mass media became global business, just as in other industries. News agencies<br />
created a global network between Western newspapers. Radio bypassed geographic<br />
borders. The film industry became global business linking Hollywood’s film production to<br />
Wall Street’s finance markets <strong>and</strong> to a global audience. Recorded music gave the pattern of<br />
concentrated ownerships. Television became powerful in spreading a global culture, shared<br />
news <strong>and</strong> has created an arena for global advertising. Internet was spread globally most<br />
rapidly. Despite internet’s openness, its dominant owners <strong>and</strong> content producers are the<br />
same who dominate other media. A few conglomerates have emerged as big transnational<br />
companies in media business, control global media, <strong>and</strong> heavily influence regional media.<br />
With such influence, the nature of the press became an issue.<br />
A functional definition of press freedom is media’s right to discuss whatever is not<br />
explicitly forbidden by law. Another approach is press freedom as a ‘regime’ which<br />
supposes that information resources are significantly independent of political or economic<br />
powers. The latter give attention to press freedom as means of power. Constructivism<br />
theory emphasises roles of regimes, agents <strong>and</strong> circumstances. Agents are actors that<br />
pursue or influence press freedom regimes. <strong>Press</strong> freedom itself is agent of democracy <strong>and</strong><br />
globalisation.<br />
The idea of press freedom grew out of the Enlightenment. John Locke made basis<br />
for freedom of expression as a civil right. His theory says that government needs support<br />
from the governed, <strong>and</strong> that people have the right of revolution including a duty to rise up<br />
against tyrants. In the United States in 1735, John Peter Zenger was found not guilty in a<br />
case on seditious libel. The defence was that he had published the truth. This is the first<br />
known trial which accepted truth as reason for press freedom. In 1791 the United States’<br />
123
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
constitution made a model for press freedom in democracy: “Congress shall make no law<br />
… abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press”. In the mid of the 20 th century John<br />
Stuart Mill’s “Essay on Liberty” influenced further development of philosophy about press<br />
freedom. He was concerned with plurality including the right to be wrong. Mill made basis<br />
for the marketplace of ideas as it was termed later. In 1948 The Universal Declaration of<br />
Human Rights made freedom of expression <strong>and</strong> press freedom to universal rights. At the<br />
same time the press’ social responsibility was regarded as media’s democratic aim.<br />
Growth of press freedom followed democratisation. In the beginning decision<br />
processes were moved out of kings’ <strong>and</strong> rulers’ domains into the public spheres.<br />
Journalism <strong>and</strong> mass media emerged out of this development <strong>and</strong> new technology. As<br />
media <strong>and</strong> press freedom grew, everyone with access to media participated the democracy<br />
as the press served to check government <strong>and</strong> others with power. In the process measures<br />
favouring a free press developed in terms of constitutional support, reduced restrictions,<br />
efficient self-regulating system, <strong>and</strong> economic conditions which ensure financial<br />
independence. There was increased access to information, protection of sources, <strong>and</strong><br />
freedom to publish without permission. <strong>Freedom</strong> to publish, however, took into account<br />
the need for self-restrictions on national security, sensitive state matters as well as<br />
protection of privacy or some other private interests. There was also protection of<br />
journalistic activities towards authorities, private actors or even the owners’ interference<br />
with editorial matters.<br />
The regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa represent different practices of press<br />
freedom. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ranks at the top of press freedom in the world. The growth started in<br />
the 18 th century as part of liberal trends in the Western world. The European Court of<br />
Human Rights harmonised Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian practice with Europe. Among means of press<br />
freedom originated in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are self-regulation, media council, media ombudsman,<br />
<strong>and</strong> the editor as guarantor of editorial independence. Reasons for press freedom have been<br />
124
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
search for truth, democracy <strong>and</strong> individual liberty. Earlier, intereference from government<br />
was the concern of press freedom. Later years, external <strong>and</strong> internal commercial forces<br />
have got attention as a threat to press freedom. Mass media are extensively spread in<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, in particular print media <strong>and</strong> internet. Privatisation of public sector has made<br />
reduced access to information to an issue. Publishing has legal restrictions towards national<br />
security, discriminations of religious, ethnic or sexual character as well as blasphemy,<br />
pornography, regulations of commercial messages, <strong>and</strong> areas of privacy <strong>and</strong> libels. Yet,<br />
ethics is a chief guide for publishing. Journalism is regarded as an activity in society which<br />
deserve extraordinary protection. Harassment of journalists is uncommon.<br />
East African countries are still in an early phase of democratisation which is<br />
reflected in the level of press freedom. Democracy is a declared goal <strong>and</strong> a lot of processes<br />
are going on towards improved press freedom. A paradox is that East Africa still struggles<br />
with restrictive press laws enacted during the colonial period. Then, the colonial masters<br />
used media as propag<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> to achieve control of information. In East Africa, reasons<br />
for press freedom have been search for truth, democracy <strong>and</strong> individual liberty. Some<br />
specific matters surrounding press freedom in East Africa have been ownership <strong>and</strong> the<br />
impact of global media.<br />
The ruling elites manipulated media to serve their own interests <strong>and</strong> promoted<br />
development journalism as means of national building. Development journalism, critics<br />
noted, was a way of reducing press freedom. While all the East African countries declare<br />
press freedom in their constitutions, a web of restrictive laws reduce the scope of freedom<br />
considerably. Among the restrictions to press freedom are that government documents of<br />
public interest remain secret. Other obstacles include the poor training of journalists <strong>and</strong><br />
weak markets that do not provide media with ability to operate as independent business.<br />
Within East Africa there are some different practices in terms of self-regulation.<br />
For instance, Kenyan media are relatively free from government, but suppressed by private<br />
125
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
individuals who have many ways to sue the media. In Ug<strong>and</strong>a it is the opposite.<br />
Government suppress media – as far as possible under sceptical donors’ monitoring.<br />
However, the level of press freedom in East Africa is increasing.<br />
Spread of media indicate media’s position in the societies, <strong>and</strong> is quite different:<br />
Comparing of spread of media<br />
in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />
Proportion<br />
Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia : East Africa<br />
Number of TV receivers per 1000 inhabitant 35 : 1<br />
Number of radio receivers per 1000 inhabitant 6 : 1<br />
Circulation of newspapers per 1000 inhabitant 87 : 1<br />
Published book titles per 1000 inhabitants 196 : 1<br />
Journalistic capacity: Journalists per 1000 inhabitants 36 : 1<br />
The statistics confirm the existence of a big gap between the regions, <strong>and</strong> that print media<br />
are luxury items in East Africa. The figures on journalistic capacity indicate different<br />
media’s ability to fulfill their role. Different levels of press freedom increase the real gap in<br />
journalistic capacity.<br />
The NWICO debate exposed such differences between North <strong>and</strong> South. The<br />
debates exposed Western media’s dominance in agenda setting, definition of truth, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
West’s superiority in terms of technology. Although the debates have cooled down, the<br />
differences have increased between poor <strong>and</strong> rich countries.<br />
Links between the two regions support the spread of press freedom in East Africa.<br />
The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries impose conditions of press freedom in their aid policy, <strong>and</strong><br />
also support to media projects in East Africa. There are also significant interactions<br />
through international press freedom NGOs. Yet, the most influential link is probably that<br />
both regions are exposed to the same international regimes on press freedom.<br />
In the context of globalisation, press freedom serves as a tool of political influence.<br />
<strong>International</strong> press freedom regimes can be legal conventions, institutions or NGOs. One<br />
such regime is the United Nations with its Article 19 on the Universal Declaration of<br />
126
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Human Rights concerning freedom of information. UNESCO is the United Nations special<br />
agency in this matter. Thus, the global human rights machinery promotes press freedom.<br />
Agents promoting press freedom regimes can be institutions, organisations,<br />
individuals <strong>and</strong> invisible forces. There are mainly four of these. First, the World Bank<br />
spreads press freedom because it is supposed to support development. Second, NGOs are<br />
agents <strong>and</strong> constitute a global movement <strong>and</strong> network for press freedom. Third, the<br />
globalising of media ethics narrows <strong>and</strong> strengthens the concept of press freedom. Fourth,<br />
harmonised journalism education <strong>and</strong> professionalisation strengthens press freedom<br />
globally.<br />
Circumstances supportive of international press freedom regimes are four. First,<br />
liberal market economy creates a symbiotic relationship with notions of press freedom.<br />
Markets provide media with economic independence to act freely. Second, a shared culture<br />
supports the growth of global media <strong>and</strong> promotion of global media freedom. Third, civil<br />
society develop partnership with media to promote free media. Fourth, in a democracy free<br />
media legitimises democratic rule. Those who benefit from a democratic system support<br />
media due to its stabilising effect.<br />
The spread of the global media raised three types of criticism. Firstly, the press has<br />
been accused of maintaining hegemony of ruling elites <strong>and</strong> being manipulated to benefit<br />
only the elite. Proprietors of global media are the same, or like-minded to, as other owners<br />
of global businesses. <strong>Press</strong> freedom is used to mean business freedom, <strong>and</strong> the spread of<br />
free media means increasing markets. Media’s social responsibility, therefore, ranks below<br />
profits for the media owners. Free media’s ability to stabilise existing order is also in the<br />
interest of the elite.<br />
Secondly, there are questions as to whether press freedom in reality supports<br />
democracy <strong>and</strong> human rights. There have been double st<strong>and</strong>ards in terms of application<br />
<strong>and</strong> expectations. The United States has been accused of double st<strong>and</strong>ards in its promotion<br />
127
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
of democracy <strong>and</strong> human rights because it has supported regimes that violate these values.<br />
Some countries have claimed that the Universal Declaration on Human Rights is not their<br />
document. They were not members of the United Nations when the declaration was formu-<br />
lated in 1948. Those who issued the declaration in 1948 had colonies or denied large<br />
segments of their population democratic rights.<br />
Thirdly, from an African point of view, there are doubts as to whether concepts of<br />
press freedom have validity to Africa. The debate on neo-colonialism regards media <strong>and</strong><br />
press freedom as means for the West to dominate the South. Other neo-colonial forces are<br />
foreign ownership of African media as well as the West’s dominance over the content. A<br />
ruling African elite has adopted Western values <strong>and</strong> style of media. They use media to<br />
maintain their own hegemony in the same way as a global elite uses global media.<br />
The picture that emerges is that press freedom is a universal concept but it has<br />
different practices. <strong>Globalisation</strong> has spread <strong>and</strong> harmonised press freedom globally <strong>and</strong><br />
yet real threats to global press freedom exist because of the forces competing for power in<br />
globalised societies. These forces do not attack press freedom openly, they do it indirectly.<br />
They attack press freedom by creating conditions which subordinate the media’s social<br />
responsibility <strong>and</strong> at the same time stress profit, politics or power. This is the case globally,<br />
in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, <strong>and</strong> in East Africa.<br />
128
Bibliography <strong>and</strong> Sources<br />
Published Primary Sources<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Government Documents<br />
Datta-Mitra, Jayati (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Policy, Participation, People (Washington: The World<br />
Bank, 2001)<br />
Jones, J. Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils : A comparative international<br />
study on professional st<strong>and</strong>ards (Paris: UNESCO <strong>Press</strong>, 1980)<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud<br />
(Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1996)<br />
________, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov (Oslo:<br />
Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003)<br />
________, Ot prp nr 77 (1996-97) : Om lov om endringer i kringkastingsloven (Medieetikk<br />
mv) (Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1997)<br />
________, St.prp. nr. 1 : (2003-2004) : for budsjetterminen 2004 (Oslo: Statens<br />
Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003)<br />
Supreme Court of Ug<strong>and</strong>a, judgement dated 11 th February, 2004, on an appeal in Monitor<br />
versus Constitutional Court, judgement published 21 st July, 2000. The judgement is<br />
published in full by The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March,<br />
2004, pp. 8-10 <strong>and</strong> 16-17.<br />
UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000 (Paris: UNESCO,<br />
1999)<br />
United Nations, “Joint Message for World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day 3 May 2001”. A leaflet<br />
published by United Nations, UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> UN High Commissioner for Human<br />
Rights.<br />
________, Basic Facts About the United Nations (New York: United Nations, 2000)<br />
United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media (Washington:<br />
U.S. Department of Commerce, 1993)<br />
Private Institutional Documents<br />
Den norske Advokatforening, Norsk Retstidende : 2002 (Oslo: Den norske Advokatforening,<br />
2002), pp. 1202-1207 containing the Norwegian Supreme Court’s judgement<br />
number 00682 – 2002.<br />
<strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, Northern Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Underst<strong>and</strong>ing <strong>and</strong> solving the conflict, an<br />
<strong>International</strong> Crisis Group Report (Nairobi/Brussels: <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group,<br />
2004), ICG Africa Report Number 77, 14 th April, 2004.<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (Vienna: The<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />
________, 1950-2000 : <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000)<br />
________, Activity Report : May 2002 – May 2004 (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Institute</strong>, 2004)<br />
129
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
________, IPI – The First Ten Years : The Story of the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong><br />
(Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1962)<br />
________, IPI Report 2003 : World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong><br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />
Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya : 2nd<br />
Edition (Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya, 2004 [2002])<br />
________, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage (Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya,<br />
2002)<br />
<strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg [Norwegian Media Council], Oslo, judgements in case 117/2003.<br />
Parts: NN versus Agderposten (newspaper). Concluding date: 16 th December, 2003.<br />
The document is available in Norwegian in the council’s database:<br />
http://81.0.149.237/pfu/, downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />
________, judgements in case 118/2004. Parts: NN versus Verdens Gang (newspaper).<br />
Concluding date: 16 th December, 2003. Downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />
________, judgements in case 107/2004. Parts: NN <strong>and</strong> XX versus Nordlys (newspaper).<br />
Concluding date: 24 th August, 2004. Downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />
The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom : Etiske normer for pressen (Oslo, The<br />
Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, 1999)<br />
Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, Lessons From the Fight Against Corruption (Nairobi:<br />
Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, 2001)<br />
Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group, 2004)<br />
Memoirs<br />
Mboya, Tom, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa” in The Challenge of<br />
Nationhood : A collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings (Nairobi: East African<br />
Educational Publishers Ltd., 1993 [1970]), pp. 136-144.<br />
Nyerere, Julius K., ”The Arusha Declaration: Socialism <strong>and</strong> Self-Reliance” in <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
<strong>and</strong> Socialism : A Selection From Writings <strong>and</strong> Speeches 1965-1967 (Dar es<br />
Salaam/London: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 1968), chapter 26, pp. 231-250.<br />
Ochieng, Philip, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics in Africa<br />
(Nairobi: Initiatives Publishers, 1992)<br />
Published Secondary Sources<br />
Books<br />
Abuoga, John Baptist <strong>and</strong> Mutere, Absalom Aggrey, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya<br />
(Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education, 1988)<br />
Ahuja, B. N., Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism : set to Indian context (Delhi: Surjeet<br />
Publications, 2004)<br />
Allan, Stuart, News Culture (Philadelphia: Open University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000 [1999])<br />
Altschull, J. Herbert, From Milton to McLuhan : The Ideas Behind American Journalism<br />
(New York: Longman, 1990)<br />
130
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Becker, Lee B., Vlad, Tudor <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Nancy, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical<br />
Report (Athens, USA: Grady College of Journalism & Mass Communication,<br />
University of Georgia, 2004). Produced for the John S. <strong>and</strong> James L. Knight<br />
Foundation.<br />
p’Bitek, Okot, African Religions in Western Scholarship (Nairobi: Kenya Literature<br />
Bureau, 1970)<br />
Bourgault, Louise M., Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa (Indianapolis: Indiana<br />
University <strong>Press</strong>, 1995)<br />
Briggs, Adam <strong>and</strong> Cobley, Paul (eds.), The Media: An Introduction (Essex: Longman,<br />
1998)<br />
Browne, Stephen, Beyond Aid : From Patronage to Partnership (Aldershot: Ashgate, 1999)<br />
Carver, Richard, Coliver, S<strong>and</strong>ra, Lauriciano, Gil, Lush, David <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Adewale,<br />
Who Rules the Airwaves : Broadcasting in Africa (London: Article 19 <strong>and</strong> Index on<br />
Censorship, 1995)<br />
Coppard, Kit, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Institute</strong> : Part II: 1976-1988 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>,<br />
1988)<br />
Dunn, Kevin C, Imaging the Congo : the international relations of identity (New York:<br />
Palgrave Macmillan, 2003)<br />
Eggen, Kyrre, Ytringsfrihet : Vernet om ytringsfriheten i norsk rett (Oslo: Cappelen, 2002)<br />
Eide, Martin, Den redigerende makt : Redaktørrollens norske historie (Kristians<strong>and</strong>,<br />
Norway: IJ-forlaget, 2000)<br />
Elkins, Caroline, Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya (London: Jonathan<br />
Cape, 2005)<br />
Falk, Richard, Predatory Globalization : A Critique, (Cambridge: Polity <strong>Press</strong>, 1999)<br />
Gerbner, George, Mowlana, Hamid <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, The Global Media Debate :<br />
Its Rise, Fall, <strong>and</strong> Renewal (New Jersey: Ablex Publishing, 1993)<br />
van der Heijden, Barend <strong>and</strong> Tahzib-Lie, Bahia, Reflections in the Universal Declaration<br />
of Human Rights : A fiftieth Anniversary Anthology (The Hague: Martinius<br />
Nijhoff Publishers, 1998)<br />
Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues worldwide<br />
(Oxford: Focal <strong>Press</strong>, 2001)<br />
Herman, Edward S. <strong>and</strong> McChesney, Robert W., The Global Media : The New<br />
Missionaries of Corporate Capitalism (London: Continuum, 1997)<br />
Hiebert, Ray Eldon <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Sheila Jean, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing<br />
World (London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999)<br />
Joyrich, Lynne: Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern Culture<br />
(Indianapolis: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996)<br />
Kemigisha, Rose Mary (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />
Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Foundation, 1998)<br />
Keohane, Robert O. <strong>and</strong> Nye, Joseph S. Jr. (eds.), Transnational <strong>and</strong> World Politics<br />
(Boston: Harvard University <strong>Press</strong>, 1973 [1970])<br />
131
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Kilimwiko, Lawrence <strong>and</strong> Mapunda, Joseph (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media<br />
in Tanzania (Dar es Salaam/Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong>, Friedrich Ebert<br />
Foundation, <strong>and</strong> Association of Journalists <strong>and</strong> Media Workers, 1998)<br />
Leaper, Glenn W., Löwstedt, Anthony <strong>and</strong> Madhoun, Husam, Caught in the Crossfire: The<br />
Iraq War <strong>and</strong> the Media – A Diary of Claims <strong>and</strong> Counterclaims (Vienna: The<br />
<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />
Leggett, Ian, Ug<strong>and</strong>a : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile<br />
(London: Oxfam/ Kampala: Fountain Publishers, 2001)<br />
Litvack, Jennie <strong>and</strong> Seddon, Jessica, Decentralization Briefing Notes (Washington: The<br />
World Bank <strong>Institute</strong>, 2000)<br />
Linard, André, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in Africa (Nairobi: Paulines<br />
Publications, 2002)<br />
Loader, Brian D., The Governance of Cyberspace : Politics, Technology <strong>and</strong> Global<br />
Restructuring (London: Routledge, 1997)<br />
Makali, David (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence (Nairobi:<br />
Phoenix Publishers, 2003)<br />
Mallette, Malcolm F. (ed.), H<strong>and</strong>book for African Journalistis : With leaders in African<br />
journalism (Reston, USA: World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 1996)<br />
Merrill, John C., Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong> Communication : third<br />
edition (New York: Longman Publishers, 1994)<br />
Miller, William L. (ed.), Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> : arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions (New York:<br />
Longman, 1995)<br />
Mudimbe, V. Y., The Idea of Africa (Bloomington: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1994)<br />
Mytton, Graham, Mass Communication in Africa (London: Edward Arnold Publishers,<br />
1983)<br />
Parenti, Michael, Inventing Reality : The Politics of the Mass Media (New York: St.<br />
Martin’s <strong>Press</strong>, 1986)<br />
Petras, James <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Henry, Globalization Unmasked : Imperialism in the 21st<br />
Century (London: Fernwood Publishing, 2001)<br />
Real, Michael R., Exploring Media Culture : A Guide (New Delhi: Sage Publications,<br />
1996)<br />
Retief, Johan, Media Ethics : An Introduction to Responsible Journalism (Oxford: Oxford<br />
University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002)<br />
Righter, Rosemary, IPI: The Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Institute</strong> : Part I: 1951-1976 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988<br />
[1976])<br />
Ruggie, John Gerard, Constructing the World Polity : Essays on international<br />
institutionalization (London: Routledge, 2000 [1998])<br />
Ruud, Arild Engelsen, 1975-1989: Vekst, velvilje og utfordringer : Norsk utviklingshjelps<br />
historie 2 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003)<br />
Sayer, Geoff, Kenya : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile<br />
(Oxford: Oxfam, 2004 [1998])<br />
Siebert, Fred S., Peterson, Theodore <strong>and</strong> Schramm, Wilbur, Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong><br />
(Illinois: Ayer Company Publishers, 2000 [1956])<br />
132
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Simensen, Jarle, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden : Norsk utviklingshjelps<br />
historie 1 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003)<br />
Stephens, Mitchell, A History of News (Fort Worth, Texas: Harcourt Brace College<br />
Publishers, 1997)<br />
Thiong’o, Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre : The Struggle for Cultural <strong>Freedom</strong>s (Nairobi:<br />
East African Educational Publishers, 1993)<br />
Tvedt, Terje, Utviklingshjelp, utenrikspolitikk og makt : Makt- og demokratiutredningen<br />
(Oslo: Gyldendal, 2003)<br />
Williams, Andrew, Failed imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth century<br />
(Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998)<br />
World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy<br />
(Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002)<br />
Chapters in Books<br />
Abubakar, Dauda, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”<br />
in Domatob, Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong><br />
the African Society (Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education,<br />
1987), pp. 52-63.<br />
Ali, Owais Aslam, “Claiming that Differences in ‘Values’ Justify News Directions” in The<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern<br />
Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Committee, 2002), pp. 71-81.<br />
An-na’im, Abdulla, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right” in Willie<br />
Musarurwa Memorial Trust, Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie<br />
Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 13-28.<br />
Aronson, Jonathan D., “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet revolution” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong><br />
Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to<br />
international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />
540-558.<br />
Besley, Timothy, Burgess, Robin <strong>and</strong> Prat, Andrea, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Political<br />
Accountability” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in<br />
Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development<br />
Studies, 2002), pp. 45-60.<br />
Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi, “The Globalization of News” in Boyd-Barrett,<br />
Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London:<br />
Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 1-14.<br />
Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen,<br />
Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications,<br />
1998), pp. 19-34.<br />
Carrington, Tim <strong>and</strong> Nelson, Mark, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”<br />
in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />
pp. 225-245.<br />
133
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Carruthers, Susan L., “<strong>International</strong> history 1900-1945” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve<br />
(eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />
relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 51-73.<br />
Chomsky, Noam, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity” in Evans, Tony (ed.),<br />
Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University<br />
<strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 24-56.<br />
Dahlgren, Peter, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden” in Curran,<br />
James <strong>and</strong> Park, Myung-Jin, De-Westernizing Media Studies (London: Routledge,<br />
2000), pp. 251-264.<br />
Dunne, Tim: “Liberalism” in in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of<br />
World Politics : An introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford:<br />
Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 162-181.<br />
Dyck, Alex<strong>and</strong>er <strong>and</strong> Zingales, Luigi, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media” in<br />
World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />
pp. 107-137.<br />
Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic<br />
Regimes: A Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony<br />
(eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative Perspective (Cambridge:<br />
Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 1-27.<br />
Halliday, Fred, “Nationalism” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization<br />
of World Politics : An introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford:<br />
Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 440-455.<br />
Herman, Edward S., “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in the United States” in World Bank, The<br />
Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington:<br />
The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 61-81.<br />
Hobden, Stephen <strong>and</strong> Jones, Richard Wyn, “Marxist theories of <strong>International</strong> Relations” in<br />
Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An<br />
introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
2001), pp. 200-223.<br />
Hydén, Göran <strong>and</strong> Leslie, Michael, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa” in<br />
Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong><br />
Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 1-27.<br />
Islam, Roumeen, “Into the Looking Glass: What the Media Tell <strong>and</strong> Why – An Overview”<br />
in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />
pp. 1-23.<br />
Jackson, Robert H., “The evolution of international society” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith,<br />
Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />
relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 35-50.<br />
Kadhi, Joe S. M., “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?” in Kunczik, Michael<br />
(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World<br />
(Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), pp. 82-133.<br />
Karanja, Mugambi, “Growth of print media in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />
Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />
Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 27-39.<br />
134
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Kivikuru, Ullamaija, “From State Socialism to Deregulation” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong><br />
Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage<br />
Publications, 1998), pp. 137-153.<br />
Krug, Peter <strong>and</strong> Price, Monroe E., “The Legal Environment for News Media” in in World<br />
Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development<br />
(Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 187-205.<br />
Kunczik, Michael, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, in<br />
Kunczik, Michael (ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the<br />
Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999) pp. 5-30.<br />
________, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, in Kunczik,<br />
Michael (ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third<br />
World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), pp. 245-268.<br />
Lamy, Steven L., “Contemporary mainstream approaches: neo-realism <strong>and</strong> neo-liberalism”<br />
in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An<br />
introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />
2001), pp. 182-199.<br />
Maloba, Wunyabari, “The Media <strong>and</strong> Mau Mau: Kenyan Nationalism <strong>and</strong> Colonial<br />
Propag<strong>and</strong>a” in Hawk, Beverly G. (ed.), Africa’s Media Image (Westport, USA:<br />
Praeger Publishers, 1992), pp. 51-61.<br />
Mbome, Peter H., “Aspects of Human Rights in an African Context” in Towards <strong>Press</strong><br />
<strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad<br />
Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 40-44.<br />
McGrew, Anthomy, “Human rights in a global age: coming to terms with globalisation” in<br />
Evans, Tony (ed.), Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester:<br />
Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 188-210.<br />
Moisy, Claude, ”Imposing Code of Ethics for Journalists : Less Innocent Than They Might<br />
Seem” in The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship<br />
: Modern Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />
Committee, 2002), pp. 5-11.<br />
Munene, G. Macharia, “Historical Perspectives on Politics <strong>and</strong> Journalism” in Okigbo,<br />
Charles (ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council<br />
for Communication Education, 1994), pp. 42-52.<br />
Mute, Lawrence Murugu, “Media policy in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther<br />
(eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media<br />
<strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 141-156.<br />
Nwosu, Ikechukwu, “An Overview of the Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society” in<br />
Domatob, Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the<br />
African Society (Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education,<br />
1987), pp. 1-9.<br />
Ochilo, Polycarp Omolo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence” in UNESCO,<br />
Public Service Broadcasting <strong>and</strong> Editorial Independence: Strengthening Democratic<br />
Voices (Helsinki, Finl<strong>and</strong>: The Finnish National Commission for UNESCO, 1998),<br />
pp. 41-49.<br />
Odero, Mitch, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.),<br />
Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong><br />
<strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 11-25.<br />
135
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Ogbondah, Chris W., “Media Laws in Political Transition” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie,<br />
Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New<br />
Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 55-80.<br />
Ogundimu, Folu Folarin, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa” in<br />
Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong><br />
Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 207-238.<br />
Okello, Rosemary, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />
Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />
Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 157-169.<br />
Okolo, Dan Edogbo, “Agenda Setting Role of the Mass Media in Political Reporting” in<br />
Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African<br />
Council for Communication Education, 1994), pp. 31-41.<br />
Okonkwo, Ifeanyi Edward, “Journalists in a Developing Economy” in Okigbo, Charles<br />
(ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for<br />
Communication Education, 1994), pp. 2-15.<br />
Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “The mass media <strong>and</strong> democracy: Underst<strong>and</strong>ing the<br />
problem of objectivity in multicultural settings” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />
Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />
Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 203-224.<br />
________, “Values, st<strong>and</strong>ards <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism: The way forward for sub-saharan<br />
Africa” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong><br />
performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert<br />
Stiftung, 2000), pp. 171-189.<br />
Owen, Bruce M., “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications” in<br />
World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />
Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />
pp. 167-185.<br />
Paterson, Chris, “Global Battlefields” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The<br />
Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 79-103.<br />
Patterson, Thomas E., “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society” in Gunther,<br />
Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative<br />
Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 241-265.<br />
Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries: A Conceptual Framework” in<br />
Porter, Michael E. (ed.), Competition in Global Industries (Boston: Harvard<br />
Business School <strong>Press</strong>, 1986), pp. 1-59.<br />
Rothgeb, John M. Jr., “The Changing <strong>International</strong> Context for Foreign Policy” in Neack,<br />
Laura, Hey, Jeanne A. K. <strong>and</strong> Haney, Patrick J. (eds.), Foreign Policy Analysis :<br />
Continuity <strong>and</strong> Change in its Second Generation (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice<br />
Hall, 1995), pp. 33-48.<br />
Shiller, Robert J., “Irrational Exuberance in the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell<br />
: The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />
Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 83-93.<br />
Smith, Steve: “Reflectivist <strong>and</strong> constructivist approaches to international theory” in Baylis,<br />
John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction<br />
to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />
224-249.<br />
136
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Stiglitz, Joseph, “Transparency in Government” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The<br />
Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />
Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 27-44.<br />
Strömberg, David, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence” in World Bank, The Right<br />
To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The<br />
World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 95-106.<br />
Walden, Ruth, “Insult Laws” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media<br />
in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development<br />
Studies, 2002), pp. 207-224.<br />
Wallerstein, Immanuel, “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in Smith,<br />
Steve, Booth, Ken, <strong>and</strong> Zalewski, Marysia (eds.), <strong>International</strong> theory: positivism<br />
<strong>and</strong> beyond (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 87-107.<br />
Woods, Ngaire, “<strong>International</strong> political economy in an age of globalization” in Baylis,<br />
John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction<br />
to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />
277-298.<br />
Journal Articles<br />
Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism” in Journal of<br />
Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19,<br />
number 2-2004, pp. 130-137.<br />
Chomsky, Noam, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence, <strong>and</strong> foreign policy” in<br />
Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003),<br />
volume 29, pp. 605-620.<br />
Christians, Clifford <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, “Social Responsibility Worldvide” in<br />
Journal of Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004),<br />
volume 19, number 1, pp. 3-28.<br />
Elliott, Deni, “Terrorism, Global Journalism <strong>and</strong> the Myth of the Nation State” in Journal<br />
of Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume<br />
19, number 1, pp. 29-45.<br />
Habermas, Jürgen, “Toward a Cosmopolitian Europe” in Journal of Democracy<br />
(Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 14, number 4, pp.<br />
86-100.<br />
Herring, Eric <strong>and</strong> Robinson, Piers, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study<br />
of the news media <strong>and</strong> US foreign policy” in Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies<br />
(Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 29, pp. 553-568.<br />
Munene, G. Macharia, “The Colonial Policies of Segregating the Kikuyu, 1920 – 1964” in<br />
Chemchemi (Nairobi: Kenyatta University <strong>and</strong> Acacia Publishers), volume 2, 2002,<br />
number 1, pp. 36-48.<br />
Pol<strong>and</strong>, Kate, “Development Moments: Radio’s Public Face of Development” in Journal of<br />
<strong>International</strong> Development (West Sussex, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 2004) volume<br />
16, number 5, July 2004, pp. 705-715.<br />
Richardson, Brian, “The Public’s Right to Know: A Dangerous Notion” in Journal of Mass<br />
Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19,<br />
number 1-2004, pp. 46-55.<br />
137
Reference works<br />
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000 (Redmond, Washington: Microsoft,<br />
1999), CD-rom.<br />
Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia : comprehensive edition (London: Philip’s, 2002)<br />
United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997 (New York: United<br />
Nations, 2000)<br />
Unpublished Sources<br />
Conference Papers<br />
Getecha, Ciru, “Audit Public Leadership as a Way of Combating Graft”, paper presented at<br />
the ‘Eastern Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at<br />
United States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004.<br />
Getecha is Professor at USIU. E-mail: cgetecha@usiu.ac.ke<br />
Munene, Macharia, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual<br />
Warriors”, paper presented in the University of Illinois NEH Seminar, African<br />
Studies in Africa, 11 th – 15 th November, 2002. Munene is Professor of History <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>International</strong> Relations at United States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi.<br />
E-mail: mmunene@usiu.ac.ke<br />
________, “Hazards of Postmodern Colonialism in Kenya”, Draft Paper prepared for<br />
Conference on ‘The Political Economy of Kenya’, Oxford University, 27th – 28th<br />
May, 2004, Oxford, United Kingdom.<br />
________, “The Media in Fighting Corruption: The Best Practice”, paper presented at the<br />
‘Eastern Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at United<br />
States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004.<br />
Correspondence, Interviews <strong>and</strong> Speeches<br />
Barth, Kodi, Lecturer of Journalism at USIU, Nairobi. Oral interview with him in his office<br />
at USIU, 1 st September, 2004, about the media in Kenya. E-mail:<br />
kbarth@usiu.ac.ke.<br />
Bäckl<strong>and</strong>er, Cecilia, Diplomat at the Swedish Embassy in Nairobi, correspondance by email<br />
in March, 2005. E-mail: cecilia@rosslyn.co.ke.<br />
Bratteli, Tone, Senior Advisor, The Norwegian Agency for Development Cooperation<br />
(NORAD). Correspondance by e-mail from January to March, 2005. E-mail:<br />
tone.bratteli@norad.no.<br />
Kadhi, Joe, notes from his address at the Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on<br />
“Is There a Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel,<br />
Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005. Kadhi is member of the Media Council of Kenya, <strong>and</strong><br />
Head of Extended Studies <strong>and</strong> Journalist in Residence at USIU, Nairobi.<br />
Kamweru, Esther, Executive Director of The Media Council of Kenya. Oral interview with<br />
her in her office in Nairobi, 10 th March, 2005, about the Media Council. E-mail:<br />
estherkamweru@yahoo.com.<br />
138
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Kilsved, Hans, Secretary-General of The Swedish Union of Journalists, correspondence by<br />
e-mail in March 2005, e-mail: hans.kilsved@sjf.se.<br />
Makunga, Theophil, Consulting Editor of Taifa Leo, Nation Media Group Ltd. in Kenya,<br />
e-mail: tmakunga@nation.co.ke. Former editor-in-chief of Majira <strong>and</strong> managing<br />
editor of Mwananchi, both Tanzanian newspapers. Oral interview with him at<br />
Nation Centre in Nairobi 1 st March, 2005, about press freedom in Tanzania.<br />
Muriuki, Muriithi, Political Reporter at Daily Nation/Sunday Nation in Kenya, e-mail:<br />
fmuriithi@nation.co.ke. Oral interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi, 7 th<br />
March, 2005, about freedom of accessing information.<br />
Odero, Mitch, notes from his closing address at Media Council of Kenya’s public<br />
conferense on “Is There a Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The<br />
Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1st March, 2005. Odero is Chairman of Media Council of<br />
Kenya.<br />
Opanga, W. Kwendo, Executive Editor of The St<strong>and</strong>ard/Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard in Kenya, email:<br />
opashw@east<strong>and</strong>ard.net. Oral interview in his office in St<strong>and</strong>ard, 10 th April,<br />
2005, about media ownerships in Kenya.<br />
Olsen, Jahn-Arne, Secretary-General of The Norwegian Union of Journalists,<br />
correspondance by e-mail in March 2005, e-mail: nj@nj.no.<br />
Olweny, Joseph, Editorial Manager at Nation Media Group Ltd. Several conferences at Nation<br />
Centre in Nairobi from January to March, 2005, e.mail: olweny@nation.co.ke<br />
Onyango-Obbo, Charles, Managing Editor of Convergence <strong>and</strong> Syndication, Nation Media<br />
Group Ltd. in Kenya, e-mail: cobbo@nation.co.ke. Former Managing Editor of the<br />
newspaper The Monitor in Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi<br />
21 st February, 2005, about press freedom in Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
Øy, Nils, Secretary-General in the Association of Norwegian Editors, e-mail:<br />
nilsoy@online.no. Correspondance by e-mail from January to March 2005 about<br />
press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />
Other Unpublished Documents<br />
Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, internal memo from Norad, Oslo, Norway, 12 th<br />
October, 2004, archive reference 842.0. E-mail: postmottak@norad.no.<br />
Internet Sources<br />
Dansk Journalistforbund: www.journalistforbundet.dk, Web site for The Danish Union of<br />
Journalists. Downloaded 11 th March, 2005.<br />
EthicNet: Databank for European Codes of Journalism Ethics: http://www.uta.fi/ethicnet/.<br />
Published on the web-site of: Department of Journalism <strong>and</strong> Mass Communication,<br />
University of Tampere, Finl<strong>and</strong>. The site contents codes of ethics for journalism for<br />
most of the European countries. Downloaded 22 nd July, 2004.<br />
Hoover’s Inc.: http://www.hoovers.com/. Hoover’s Inc. delivers comprehensive company,<br />
industry, <strong>and</strong> market intelligence. The database consist of 12 million companies,<br />
with in-depth coverage of 40,000 of the world’s top business enterprises. Actual<br />
companies searched 12 th January, 2005.<br />
Norsk <strong>Press</strong>eforbund: http://www.presse.no/, Web site for The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong><br />
Association. Subpage http://81.0.149.237/pfu/ include judgements from the<br />
139
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Norwegian Media Council which is conducted by the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association,<br />
actual judgements downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />
Norsk Redaktørforening [The Association of Norwegian Editors]: www.nored.no. The<br />
declaration “Redaktørplakaten” is a joint document between The Association of<br />
Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> Norwegian Media Business Association, downloaded 10 th<br />
February, 2005.<br />
The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>: www.freemedia.at, Web site for IPI. Homepage <strong>and</strong><br />
subpages downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />
The Norwegian Government, “Straffeprosessloven”. This law on criminal procedure is<br />
available on: http://www.lovdata.no/all/nl-19810522-025.html, downloaded 28 th<br />
March, 2005.<br />
The World Bank’s statistical database: http://www.worldbank.org/data. World<br />
Development Indicators database: http://devdata.worldbank.org/data-query/. Search<br />
downloaded 20 th December, 2004.<br />
World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: http://www.wpfc.org. Web site for WPFC, an umbrella<br />
organisation of 45 affiliates (national og international organisations) concerned<br />
with press freedom. Homepage <strong>and</strong> subpages downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />
Newspaper <strong>and</strong> Magazine Articles<br />
Abdallah, Halima, “ ‘Monitor’ journalists win case over chopper report” in Daily Nation<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 1 st April, 2004.<br />
Barth, Kodi, “The laws needed for those with cameras” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 6 th March, 2005.<br />
Bindra, Sunny, “The real achievement of 2003 is an open society” in Sunday Nation<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 21 st December, 2003.<br />
Daily Nation, “Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother” in Daily Nation<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 27 th January, 2005.<br />
________, “Government set to review press laws, says Kiraitu” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 5 th April, 2004.<br />
________, “ ‘Nation’ writer’s ordeal at GSU officer’s home” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 24 th February, 2005.<br />
________, “Narc won’t cow the press” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />
editorial, 13 th January, 2005.<br />
________, “Tuju’s order to censor broadcasts ‘is illegal’ ” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
________, “They want to kill Kiss FM, says Kalonzo” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), news article, 20 th April, 2004.<br />
Eikje, Ove, “God journalistikk er en vaktbikkje” in Dagen (Bergen, Norway: Dagbladet<br />
Dagen), news article, 18 th February, 2004.<br />
Godbole, Madhav, “Good Governance: A Distant Dream” (commentary) in Economic <strong>and</strong><br />
Political Weekly (Mumbai: Sameeksha Trust, 2004), volume XXXIX, number 11,<br />
13 th March, 2004, pp. 1103-1107.<br />
Journalisten, “<strong>Press</strong>estøtten kuttes fem prosent” in Journalisten (Oslo: Norsk Journalistlag),<br />
news article, 11 th May, 2004.<br />
140
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Kadida, Jillo, “Editor <strong>and</strong> CID officer on theft charge” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), news article, 2 nd October, 2003.<br />
Kago, Tony <strong>and</strong> Kadida, Jillo, “State drops libel case : Outdated law will never be used<br />
again, says Wako” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article,<br />
21 st January, 2005.<br />
Kamau, John, “How Kenyatte gagged the press to manage the Mboya crisis” in Sunday<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 25 th April, 2004.<br />
________, “When You Had to Shut up or Languish in Prison for Years” in Media Review,<br />
a pull-out in eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 38-41.<br />
Lehihi, Masego, “Broadcast Headaches” in Business in Africa (Rivonia, South Africa:<br />
Business in Africa Group, 2004), news article, June 2004, pp. 24-25.<br />
Makali, David, “Progress <strong>and</strong> Problems in Freeing Kenya’s Airwaves” in Media Review,<br />
a pull-out in eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 13-14<br />
<strong>and</strong> 18.<br />
Mkapa, Benjamin <strong>and</strong> Halonen, Tarja, “<strong>Globalisation</strong> Can Work, the Question is: How?”<br />
in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 15 th March,<br />
2004.<br />
Mudi, Maureen, “Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />
The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 15 th January, 2005.<br />
Mungai, Kibe, “Balanced justice” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />
commentary, 10 th April, 2005.<br />
Murimi, Joseph, “ ‘St<strong>and</strong>ard’ writer faces libel charge” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 14 th January, 2005.<br />
Musoke, David, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Publishers Right to Information Bill” in The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />
Mwaura, Peter, “Criminal libel: AG missed the real issue” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), commentary, 22 nd January, 2005.<br />
Nakkazi, Esther, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations” in The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 12 th January, 2004.<br />
Ngari, Johnson L., “<strong>Freedom</strong> of the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> its responsibility” in East African St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
(Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 27 th April, 2004.<br />
Ngotho, Kamau, “Mr Moneybags : EXCLUSIVE: In Kenya, politics <strong>and</strong> high finance are<br />
two sides of the same coin. And the game is played by the same people” in The<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 8 th January, 2005.<br />
Ogutu, Judy, “Mwau seeks orders to bar ‘The St<strong>and</strong>ard’ ” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
Oloo, J. B., “Why media freedom is so vital” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />
Group), reader’s letter, 21 st December, 2003.<br />
Oluoch, Fred, “Is <strong>Globalisation</strong> Eroding Our Culture?” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />
Nation Media Group), news article, 29 th December, 2003.<br />
Omdal, Sven Egil, “Menn som slår, kommer i avisen” in Stavanger Aftenblad (Stavanger,<br />
Norway: Stavanger Aftenblad), commentary, 15 th January, 2005. The article is also<br />
published at: http://web3.aftenbladet.no/debatt/medieblikk/article169781.ece,<br />
downloaded 25 th January, 2005.<br />
141
<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />
Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free, So Terrorised” in The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />
________, “Ug<strong>and</strong>ans like dirty pictures, so why faint at the V-word?” in The East African<br />
(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 28 th February, 2005.<br />
Savio, Roberto, “New Information Order Leading Towards ‘Unthink’ ” in The East<br />
African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 19 th April, 2004.<br />
Shikwati, James, “It’s a potential threat to <strong>Press</strong> freedom” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />
Media Group), commentary, 22 nd April, 2004.<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard Team, “Outrage by donors over press harassment” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 13 th January, 2005.<br />
Suri, Sanjay, “How IMF, World Bank Brought Down Zambian Economy” in The East<br />
African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 7 th June, 2004.<br />
The East African, “Media <strong>and</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: Ug<strong>and</strong>a Supreme Court Kicks Out Colonial Law”<br />
in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004. This is an<br />
introduction article to the whole judgement of Supreme Court, see ‘Documents’<br />
below.<br />
The Kenyan Government, “Why Mwai Kibaki does not speak out on everything” in Daily<br />
Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), advertisement, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />
The Media Council of Tanzania, “Norwegian Embassy donates 24 m/- for WAPC<br />
conference” in Media Watch (Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania,<br />
2004), number 56, August 2004.<br />
________, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting centre for training of journos” in Media Watch<br />
(Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), number 57, September<br />
2004.<br />
________, “Supporters of the WAPC conference in Bagamoyo” in Media Watch (Dar es<br />
Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), number 59, November 2004.<br />
Wachira, Nick, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?” in The<br />
St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 22 nd March, 2005.<br />
Wakabi, Wairagala, “Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a Still Have Though <strong>Press</strong> Laws” in The East<br />
African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />
142